aftersales.fiat.comaftersales.fiat.com/elumdata/en/00/135_idea/00_135_idea... · 2012. 6. 14. ·...

Dear Customer,

Thank you for selecting Fiat and congratulations on your choice of a Fiat Idea.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all your new Fiat Idea’s features and use it in the best possible way.

You should read it right through before taking the road for the first time.

You will find information, tips and important warnings regarding the driving of your car to help you derive the maximum from yourFiat Idea’s technological features. You will find very valuable tips for your own safety, the car’s wellbeing and about how to protectthe environment.

You are recommended to read carefully the warnings and indications, marked with the respective symbols, at the end of the page:

personal safety;

the car’s wellbeing;

environmental protection.

The enclosed “Warranty Booklet” lists the services that Fiat offers to its Customers:

❒ the Warranty Certificate with terms and conditions for maintaining its validity❒ the range of additional services available to Fiat Customers

Best regards and good motoring!

This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Idea versions. As a consequence, you should consider only theinformation which is related to the engine and bodywork version of the car you purchased.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 1

MUST BE READ!

�

K

REFUELLING

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) not less than 95.

Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.

The use of other products or mixtures may irreparably damage the engine with invalidation of the warranty due tothe damage caused.

ENGINE STARTING

Petrol engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.

Diesel engines: make sure that the handbrake is engaged; set the gearshift lever to neutral; fully depress the clutchwithout pressing the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the Y and m warning lights togo off; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started.

PARKING ON FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

While working, the catalyst develops a very high temperature. Do not park the car over grass, dry leaves, pine nee-dles or any other inflammable materials: risk of fire.

RESPECTING THE ENVIRONMENT

A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection isfitted in your car.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 2

ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES

If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), visit a FiatDealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support the required load.

CODE card

Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on the CODEcard with you in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.

THE Owner Handbook CONTAINS…

…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) ! (the car’s wellbeing).

�

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 3

4

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

DASHBOARD........................................................................ 5

INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 7

SYMBOLS ............................................................................... 9

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM ................................................. 9

KEY KIT AND DOOR LOCKING .................................. 10

IGNITION SWITCH............................................................ 18

INSTRUMENTS ..................................................................... 19

MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ........................................... 20

RECONFIGURABLE MULTIFUNCTION DISPLAY ... 23

ADJUSTMENT OF THE WHEEL ...................................... 36

ADJUSTMENT OF THE SEATS......................................... 36

HEAD RESTRAINTS ............................................................ 41

REARVIEW MIRRORS ......................................................... 42

HEATING/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................... 44

HEATING AND VENTILATION...................................... 45

MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ................... 48

AUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................................................... 51

EXTERNAL LIGHTS............................................................. 58

WINDOW WASHING....................................................... 60

CRUISE CONTROL ............................................................ 63

CEILING LIGHTS ................................................................. 64

LIGHT CONTROL BUTTONS......................................... 66

INERTIAL FUEL CUT- OFF SWITCH............................. 67

INTERIOR FITTINGS ......................................................... 68

SMOKERS’ KIT ...................................................................... 71

SUNROOF.............................................................................. 72

POWER WINDOWS ......................................................... 74

REAR WINDOW WINDERS ............................................ 75

BOOT ...................................................................................... 76

BONNET ................................................................................ 80

ROOF RACK/SKI RACK .................................................... 81

HEADLIGHTS........................................................................ 82

ABS SYSTEM ......................................................................... 83

EOBD SYSTEM ..................................................................... 84

SOUND SYSTEM.................................................................. 85

ACCESSORIES PURCHASED BY THE OWNER ......... 86

“DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWER STEERING SYSTEM ............................................................. 87

PARKING SENSORS ........................................................... 88

AT THE FILLING STATION ............................................. 90

PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT ............................ 92

DDDAASSHHBBOOAARRDD AANNDD CCOONNTTRROOLLSS

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 4

DASHBOARD

The presence and the position of the instruments and warning lights may vary according to the versions.

According to Customer’s requirements the upper and lower central console can offer different solutions, as shown in the follow-ing figures.

1. Side vents - 2. Left-hand stalk - 3. Upper left oddment compartment - 4. Right-hand stalk - 5. Central vents - 6. Instrument panel - 7. Upper right oddment compartment housing the front passenger’s airbag deactivation switch - 8. Glove com-partment - 9. Front passenger’s airbag - 10. Heating/ventilation/climate controls - 11. Control buttons - 12. Sound system (whereprovided) - 13. Ignition switch - 14. Driver’s airbag - 15. Cruise Control (where provided).

5

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

F0R0734m

fig. 1

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 5

6

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 2 F0H0231m

Upper central console:

❒ with fixed oddment compartment Aand removable oddment compart-ment (DIN) B for sound system in-stallation fig. 2;

❒ with sound system upon request fig. 3;

❒ with Connect Nav + fig. 4.

fig. 3 F0H0232m

fig. 4 F0H0735m

Lower central console:

❒ with heater A-fig. 5;

❒ with manual climate control system B-fig. 6;

❒ with automatic two-zone climate con-trol system C-fig. 7.

fig. 5 F0H0233m

fig. 6 F0H0234m

fig. 7 F0H0235m

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 6

7

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

F0H0706m

Modal

A – Speedometer

B – Fuel gauge with reserve warning light

C – Engine coolant temperature gauge withhigh temperature warning light

D – Rev counter

E – Multifunction display

cm Warning lights fitted on Multijet versions only

INSTRUMENT PANEL

fig. 8

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 7

8

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

F0H0707m

Comfort

A – Speedometer

B – Fuel gauge with reserve warning light

C – Engine coolant temperature gauge withhigh temperature warning light

D – Rev counter

E – Reconfigurable multifunction display

cm Warning lights fitted on Multijet ver-sions only

fig. 9

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 8

9

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

F0H0012mfig. 10

SYMBOLS

Special coloured labels have been attachednear or actually on some of the compo-nents of your Fiat Idea. These labels bearsymbols that remind you of the precau-tions to be taken as regards that particu-lar component.

The plate summarising the symbols usedcan be found under the bonnet fig. 10.

THE FIAT CODE SYSTEM

To further protect you car from theft, ithas been fitted with an engine immobilis-ing system. This system is automatically ac-tivated when the ignition key is removed.

An electronic device, in fact, is fitted ineach ignition key grip. The device trans-mits a radio-frequency signal when the en-gine is started through a special aerial builtinto the ignition switch. The modulate sig-nal, which changes each time the engine isstarted, is the “password”, by means ofwhich the control unit recognises the keyand enables to start the engine.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 9

10

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS KEY KIT AND DOORLOCKING

CODE CARD (Optional for versions/marketswhere applicable) fig. 11

The car is delivered with the keys and theCODE card which bears the following:

❒ the electronic code A;

❒ the mechanical key code B to be giv-en to the Fiat Dealership when or-dering duplicate keys.

IMPORTANT In order to ensure perfectefficiency of the electronic devices con-tained inside the keys, they should neverbe exposed to direct sunlight.

OPERATION

Each time the car is started turning the ig-nition key to MAR, the Fiat CODE sys-tem control unit sends a recognition codeto the engine control unit to deactivatethe inhibitor.

The code is sent only if the Fiat CODEsystem control unit has recognised thecode transmitted from the key.

Each time the ignition key is turned to theSTOP position, the Fiat CODE systemdeactivates the functions of the engineelectronic control unit.

At starting, if the code has not been recog-nised correctly, the warning light Y willcome on.

In this case, the key should be moved tothe STOP position and then back toMAR; if the lock continues, possibly tryagain with the other key provided with thecar. If it is still not possible to start the car,then contact a Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT Every key has its own code,which must be memorised by the systemcontrol unit. To memorise new keys, upto a maximum of eight, apply to Fiat Deal-ership.

Warning light Y coming on whendriving

❒ If the warning light Y turns on, thismeans that the system is running a self-test (for example for a voltage drop).Should the inconvenience persists,contact a Fiat Dealership.

The electronic componentsinside the key may be dam-aged if the key is submitted tosharp knocks.

All the keys and the CODEcard must be handed over tothe new owner when sellingthe car.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 10

11

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

MAIN KEY WITH REMOTECONTROL fig. 12

The metal insert A of the key is grip-re-tractable.

The key operates:

❒ the ignition switch;

❒ driver’s door lock;

❒ cut-in of door lock device D-fig. 13when the electric system is failing (e.g.run-down battery);

❒ cut-in of child lock safety device E onrear doors.

fig. 11 F0H0700m fig. 12 F0H0701m

fig. 13 F0H0246m

Button B-fig. 12 opens the metal insertA.

To refit the metal insert A into the keygrip:

❒ keep button B pressed

❒ move the metal insert A

❒ release button B and then turn themetal insert A until hearing the clickas it locks into place.

Button Ë unlocks the doors, the tailgateand the fuel cap.

Button Á locks the doors, the tailgate andthe fuel cap.

Button R unlocks the boot.

IMPORTANT The remote control systemfrequency can be disturbed by significantradio transmissions outside the car (e.g:mobile phones, HAM radio systems, etc.)that could cause remote control malfunc-tioning.

Button B-fig. 12 should onlybe pressed when the key is

away from the body, in particularfrom the eyes and from objects thatcan be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Make surethe key can never be touched by oth-ers, especially children, who may in-advertently press the button.

WARNING

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 11

12

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Opening the doors and the tailgate

Pressing and keeping the pushbuttonpressed Ë: for a short time: remote un-locking of doors, boot lid, unlocking of fu-el lid, timed switching on of inner rooflamp and double blinking.

Doors will be unlocked automatically if thefuel inertial cut-off switch comes into op-eration.


fig. 14 F0H0702m

Closing the doors and the tailgate

Pressing and keeping the pushbuttonpressed Á: for a short time: remote lock-ing of doors, boot lid, locking of fuel lid,switching off of inner roof lamp and sin-gle blinking.

Deterrence led

When locking the doors, the led on but-ton A-fig. 15 switches on for about 3 sec-onds and than starts flashing (deterrencefunction). Once doors are locked, if oneor more doors or the tailgate are notclosed correctly, the led and direction in-dicators will start flashing quickly.


fig. 15 F0H0703m

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 12

13

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 16 F0H0702m

Opening the tailgate from the outside fig. 16

The tailgate can be opened from the out-side by pressing the remote control but-ton R. Tailgate opening will obtain dou-ble direction indicators flashing.


Locking doors from the inside fig. 15

With doors closed, press the button A lo-cated on the dashboard in central position,to lock (led on the button ON) or unlock(led on the button OFF) the doors.

IMPORTANT Door locking from insidewill not cut-in if one door is not prefect-ly closed or there is a system failure.

If the cause of the failure is removed, thedevice will start working properly.

If the inside locking button ispressed accidentally, whengetting out of the car only thedoors used will unlock where-

as the tailgate will stay locked.To re-align the system, press the lock / unlockbutton again.

fig. 17 F0H0704m

Replacing the battery of the keywith remote control fig. 17

Battery replacement:

❒ press button A and move the metal in-sert B to open position;

❒ use a finely-tipped screwdriver to turnthe screw C;

❒ pull out the battery holder D and re-place the battery E making sure thatthe bias is correct;

❒ re-insert the battery holder D in thekey and lock it turning the screw C.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 13

14

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 19 F0H0322m

Request for additional remotecontrols

The system can recognise up to 8 keyswith incorporated remote control. Shoulda new key with remote control be nec-essary, contact a Fiat Dealership, takingwith you the CODE card, a personal iden-tity document and the car’s ownershipdocuments.

Used batteries are harmful tothe environment. They shouldbe disposed of as specified bylaw in the special containers

provided, or take them to a Fiat Deal-ership, which will deal with their dis-posal.

fig. 18 F0H0014m

KEY WITHOUT REMOTECONTROL (SPARE KEY) (where required)

The metal insert A-fig. 18 of the key isgrip-retractable.

The key operates:


❒ the driver’s door;

❒ cut-in of door lock device C-fig. 19when the electric system is failing (e.g.run-down battery;

❒ cut-in of child lock safety device D-fig. 19 on rear doors.

Button B-fig. 18 opens the metal insertA.

To refit the metal insert A into the keygrip:

❒ keep button B pressed

❒ move the metal insert A

❒ release button B and then turn themetal insert A until hearing the clickas it locks into place.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 14

15

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

Button B should only bepressed when the key is

away from the body, in particularfrom the eyes and from objects thatcan be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Make surethe key can never be touched by oth-ers, especially children, who may in-advertently press the button.

WARNING

fig. 20 F0H0705m fig. 21 F0H0322m

KEY WITHOUT REMOTECONTROL (SPARE KEY) (where required)

The metal insert A-fig. 20 of the key isfixed.

The key operates:


❒ the driver’s door;

❒ cut-in of door lock device C-fig. 21when the electric system is failing (e.g.run-down battery);

❒ cut-in of child lock safety device D-fig. 21 on rear doors.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 15

16

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

Type ofkey

Pressing the pushbutton Ë enables fuel lid to be opened.

The main functions that can be activated with the keys (with or without remote control) are the following:

Door opening

Key turning counterclockwise(driver’s side)

Key turning counterclockwise(driver’s side)

Pressing briefly button Ë

Two flashings

Turning off

Door lockingfrom the outside

Key turning clockwise(driver’s side)

Key turning clockwise (driver’s side)

Pressing briefly button Á

One flashing

Turned on fixed for approx. 3 seconds, followed by deterrence led flashing

Boot opening

Pressing on button R

Two flashings

Deterrence led flashing

Spare key withoutremote control

Main key with remote control

Direction indicatorsflashing (only with key with remote control)

Deterrence led

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 16

17

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

CHILD LOCK fig. 22

To prevent opening the rear doors fromthe inside.

This device can be engaged only withdoors open.

❒ position 1 - engaged (door locked);

❒ position 2 - disengaged (door open-able from inside).

The device A is engaged even if the doorsare unlocked by the centralised system.

IMPORTANT Always use the lock whentransporting children.

IMPORTANT After engaging the lock,check by trying to open a rear door withthe internal handle.

Child lock device A is prop-erly engaged only if after

turning the revolving plug it clicks inhorizontal position (1).

WARNING

Child lock device A is prop-erly disengaged only if after

turning the revolving plug it clicks invertical position (2).

WARNINGfig. 22 F0H0101m

EMERGENCY DEVICE FOR LOCKING DOORS FROM THE OUTSIDE fig. 23

Doors are fitted with a special device en-abling to lock all doors when the electricsystem is failing (no current).

To lock the doors:

❒ fit the ignition key into the revolvingplug B;

❒ turn the device to position 1 and closethe door.

To open the doors:

❒ fit the ignition key into the revolvingplug of the driver’s door and turn itcounterclockwise;

❒ open the driver’s door;

❒ once inside the car, open the otherdoors using the levers set on doorhandles.

fig. 23 F0H0247m

Never operate the child lockdevice and the door handle

at the same time.

WARNING

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 17

18

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS IGNITION SWITCH

The key can be turned to 3 different po-sitions fig. 24:

❒ STOP: engine off, key can be re-moved, steering column locked. Cer-tain electrical devices (e.g.: sound sys-tem, power windows…) can work.

❒ MAR: driving position. All electricaldevices are powered.

❒ AVV: engine starting (unstable posi-tion).

The ignition switch is fitted with a safetymechanism that, in the event the engine isnot started, turns back the ignition key toSTOP before repeating the starting op-eration.

fig. 24 F0H0021m

STEERING COLUMN LOCK

Engaging

When the key is to STOP remove thekey and turn the steering wheel until itlocks.

Disengaging

Rock the steering wheel slightly as youturn the ignition key to MAR.

If the ignition device is tam-pered with (e.g.: attempted

theft), have it checked over by a FiatDealership.

WARNING

Never remove the ignitionkey while the car is moving.

The steering wheel would automati-cally lock as soon as you try to turnit. This also applies when the car isbeing towed.

WARNING

When getting out of the car,always remove the key to

prevent any occupants from acci-dentally activating the controls. Re-member to engage the handbrake. Ifthe car is parked on uphill slope toengage the first gear. If the car is fac-ing downhill, engage the reverse gear.Never leave unsupervised children inthe car.

WARNING

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 18

19

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSINSTRUMENTS

SPEEDOMETER fig. 25

Speed indicator.

REV. COUNTER fig. 26

Engine rpm indicator.

IMPORTANT The electronic injectioncontrol system gradually shuts off the flowof fuel when the engine is “over-revving”resulting in a gradual loss of engine pow-er.

When the engine is idling, the rev countermay indicate a gradual or sudden higher-ing of the speed.

This is normal as it takes place during nor-mal operation, for example when activat-ing the climate control system or the fan.In particular a slow change in the speedpreserves the battery charge.

FUEL LEVEL GAUGE fig. 27

This shows the amount of fuel left in thefuel tank (see the indications given in para-graph “At the filling station").

fig. 25 F0H0708m

fig. 26 F0H0022m

fig. 27 F0H0023m

fig. 28 F0H0024m

The reserve warning light A turns on toindicate that approx. 6 litres of fuel are leftin the tank.

Do not travel with the fuel tank almostempty: the gaps in fuel delivery could dam-age the catalyst.

ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURE GAUGE fig. 28

The turning on of the warning light A in-dicates that the coolant fluid temperatureis too high; in this case, stop the engineand contact a Fiat Dealership.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 19

20

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS This shows the temperature of the enginecoolant fluid and begins working when thefluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.

Under normal conditions, the needleshould hover around the middle of thescale according to the working conditions.

IMPORTANT If the needle reaches thelow temperature area with warning lightA on, this means that there is a failure.Contact a Fiat Dealership.

If the needle reaches the redarea, stop the engine imme-diately and contact a FiatDealership.

MULTIFUNCTIONALDISPLAY(on two-line modalpanel)

The car can be equipped with a multi-function display that shows useful infor-mation for car driving according to thesettings made. fig. 29 F0H0027m

“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 29

The standard screen shows the followinginformation:

A Odometer (viewing of covered km ormiles)

B Time (always displayed, even with ig-nition key removed and front doorsclosed)

C Headlight aiming position (only withdipped beam headlights on).

NOTE When opening one of the frontdoors, the display turns on and shows theclock and the kilometres or miles coveredfor a few seconds.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 20

21

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 30

+ To scroll the next items on the dis-played menu and the related optionsor increase the displayed value.

MODE Press briefly to access the menuand/or go to next screen or con-firm the required menu option.

Hold pressed to go back to thestandard screen.

– To scroll the previous items on thedisplayed menu and the related op-tions or reduce the displayed value.

NOTE Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations.

Adjusting the buzzer volume

To adjust the desired volume proceed asfollows:

❒ press the button MODE several timesuntil the text “bUZZ” appears;

❒ press the button + to increase thevolume;

❒ press the button – to reduce the vol-ume;

❒ press the button MODE and hold itpressed for over 2 seconds to confirmthe volume change.

Indication that the set peed limit hasbeen exceeded

Proceed as described below to set a ref-erence car speed value beyond which thesystem warns the driver about this by dis-playing a message and starting the buzzer.

The car is delivered with this function in“OFF”mode.

SETUP MENU

The “Setup Menu” is used to make the fol-lowing settings and/or adjustments:

❒ ADJUSTING THE CLOCK

❒ ADJUSTING THE BUZZER VOLUME

❒ SETTING THE SPEED LIMIT

❒ SETTING THE UNIT

Adjusting the clock

The car is delivered with the clock ad-justed for 24 hours.

To set the required time proceed as fol-lows:

❒ press the button MODE several timesuntil the text “Hour” appears;

❒ press the button + to increase thetime by one minute;

❒ press the button – to reduce the timeby one minute;

Hold the buttons + or – pressed for a fewseconds to automatically start quick in-crease or reduction of the time until thebuttons are released.

❒ Press the button MODE and hold itpressed for over 2 seconds to confirmthe time change.

fig. 30 F0H0736m

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 21

22

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Setting the unit

To set the required unit (kilometres ormiles) proceed as follows:

❒ press the button MODE several timesuntil the text “Unit” appears;

❒ press the button + or – to change theunit;

❒ press the button MODE and hold itpressed for over 2 seconds to confirmthe unit setting.

Viewing of the fuel cut-off inertialswitch tripping

The screen automatically appears when-ever the fuel cut-off inertial switch trips af-ter a significant collision.

This switch stops fuel supply.

See the information provided in the ded-icated chapter “Fuel cut-off inertialswitch”.

Set this function as follows:

❒ press the button MODE several timesuntil the text “SPEEd” appears;

❒ press the button + to increase thespeed value (max. limit being 250Km/h);

❒ press the button – to reduce thespeed value (min. limit being 30 Km/hbelow which the system goes back to“OFF” mode);

❒ press the button MODE and hold itpressed for over 2 seconds to confirmthe speed setting.

If, after the message“FPSon” appears, you smell

fuel or see leaks from the fuel supplysystem, do not reset the switch toavoid the risk of starting a fire.

WARNING

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 22

23

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 31 F0H09000m

MULTIFUNCTIONALDISPLAY(on three-line comfortpanel)

The car can be equipped with a multi-function display that shows useful infor-mation for car driving according to thesettings made.

“STANDARD” SCREEN fig. 31

The standard screen shows the followinginformation:

A Date

B Odometer (viewing of covered km ormiles)

C Time (always displayed, even with ig-nition key removed and front doorsclosed)

CONTROL BUTTONS fig. 32

+ To scroll the next items on the dis-played menu and the related optionsor increase the displayed value.

MODE Press briefly to access the menuand/or go to next screen or con-firm the required menu option.

Hold pressed to go back to thestandard screen.

– To scroll the previous items on thedisplayed menu and the related op-tions or reduce the displayed value.

NOTE Buttons + and – activate differentfunctions according to the following situ-ations.

D External temperature

E Headlight aiming position (only withdipped beam headlights on)

NOTE When opening one of the frontdoors, the display turns on and shows theclock and the kilometres or miles coveredfor a few seconds.

fig. 32 F0H0736m

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 23

24

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Adjustment of headlight aiming device (only with dipped beam headlights on)

– when the standard screen is enabled, theheadlight aiming device can be regulated(refer to paragraph “Headlights” in thissection).

Setup menu

– to scroll the previous and next items inthe menu;

– to increase or decrease values duringsetting operations.

SETUP MENU fig. 33

The menu comprises a series of functionsarranged in a cycle which can be selectedthrough buttons + and – to access the dif-ferent “select” operations and settings(setup) described in the following para-graphs.

The setup menu is activated by pressingbriefly button MODE.

Intermittent pressing of buttons + and –enables scrolling of the setup menu op-tions.

Handling modes are different according tothe characteristic of the option selected.

Selecting the “Set Date”and “Set time”

– Briefly press button MODE to selectthe first value to be changed (e.g. hours/minutes or year / month / day).

– Press buttons + and – (by single press-ing) to select the new setting.

– Briefly press button MODE to store thenew setting and at the same time go to thenext setup menu option. If the processedoption is the last one, the system bringsyou back to the previously selected optionof the main menu.

Prolonged pressing of the buttonMODE enables:

– exiting the setup menu page and savingof the changes already stored by the dri-ver (and confirmed by briefly pressing thebutton MODE).

The setup menu page is timed. Only thechanges saved by the user by briefly press-ing MODE are saved when the menu isautomatically closed.

NOTE If the Connect Nav+ system is in-stalled, only the following functions can beadjusted/set from the Instrument Panel:“Brightness”, “Speed Beep”, Light Sen-sors” (where provided), “Seat beltBuzzer” and “Passenger’s Airbag”. Theother functions are displayed on the Con-nect Nav+ system which is used to ad-just/set them.

Selecting a menu option

– Briefly press button MODE to selectthe menu option that needs to bechanged.

– Press buttons + and – (by single press-ing) to select the new setting.

– Briefly press button MODE to store thenew setting and at the same time go backto the previously selected menu option.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 24

25

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

Day

Year Month

Example:

CONSUMPTION

EXITING THE MENU

SPEED BEEP.

CLOCK SETTINGLIGHT SENS.TRIP B

CLOCK MODE

SETTING THE DATE

KEY

DIST. UNIT

VOL. BUTTONS

VOL. BUZZER

SERVICE

LANGUAGE

TEMP. UNIT

Example:

–+

+–

–

–

+

+

– –+

+ +

+–

–

–+

+

–

MODEbrief buttonpressing

From the standard screen, briefly press button MODEto start browsing. Press + or – to browse within themenu. NOTE Only the short menu may be accessedfor reasons of safety while the car is moving (“Bright-ness” and “Speed Beep” settings). Stop the car to ac-cess the full menu. In cars equipped with a ConnectNav+ system, many functions are viewed from the nav-igator display.

–

+

+–

MODEbrief button

pressing

DeutschEnglish

Español

Italiano

Português

Français

(*) This function may only bedisplayed after the SBR sys-tem is deactivated by a FiatDealership.fig. 33

+

–+

–+

–

+–

+–

BELT BUZZ.(*) where provided

BAG. PASS.

F0H0000m

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 25

26

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Speed limit (Speed beep)

This function enables setting of the carspeed limit (km/h or mph). When this lim-it is exceeded the driver is immediatelyalerted (see section “Warning lights andmessages”).

To set the speed limit, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: the displaywill show the wording “Speed Beep”;

– press button + or – to select speed lim-it activation (On) or deactivation (Off);

– if the function is on, press buttons + or– to select the required speed limit andthen press MODE to confirm.

To cancel the setting, proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: ON flash-es on the display;

– press button +: OFF flashes on the dis-play;

– briefly press button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the buttonfor a prolonged time to go back to thestandard screen without storing the set-tings.

Note The speed may be set in the rangefrom 30 to 250 km/h, or from 20 to 155mph according to the previously chosenunit (see “Setting the distance unit”) de-scribed below. The setting will in-crease/decrease by 5 units each time but-ton +/– is pressed. Hold button +/–pressed to increase/decrease the settingrapidly. Complete the setting by brieflypressing the button when you approachthe required value.


001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 26

27

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSAdjusting the sensitivity of the automatic headlight sensor(Light sensor) (where provided)

This function is used to adjust the dusksensor sensitivity according to three lev-els (level 1 = minimum, level 2 = medium,level 3 = maximum); the higher the sen-sitivity, the lower the quantity of exter-nal light needed to switch the headlightson. The car is delivered with this functionset to level “2”.

To change this setting:

– briefly press button MODE: the previ-ously set level flashes on the display;

– press button + or – for selecting the de-sired level;


Trip B On/Off (Trip B)

Through this option it is possible to acti-vate (On) or deactivate (Off) the Trip B(partial trip) display.

For further information see section “Tripcomputer”.

For activation / deactivation, proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MODE: ON orOFF flashes on the display (according toprevious setting);

– press button + or – for selecting the de-sired value;


Setting the clock (Set time)

This function enables setting of the clock.

To set the clock proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: the displayshows the “hours” flashing;

– press button + or – to set the clock;

– briefly press button MODE: “min-utes”starts flashing on the display;

– press button + or – to set the clock.

Note The setting increases or decreasesby one unit each time button + or – ispressed. Hold the button pressed to au-tomatically start a quick increase/decreaseof the set value. Complete the setting bybriefly pressing the button when the re-quired setting is approached.


001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 27

28

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Release of doors and tailgate (Key)

This function enables the release of thefront and rear doors, the release of thedriver's door only or the release of all thedoors including the tailgate.

To set the function, proceed as follows:

– press the MODE button for a shorttime, the display shows “Open doors”,“Op. drv.door” and “Open all”.

– press + or – to select; the selected itemwill flash.

– Press MODE for a short time to returnto the menu screen or press the buttonfor a longer time to return to the standardscreen without confirming the selection.

– briefly press button MODE: the monthstarts flashing on the display;

– press button + or – to set the month;

– briefly press button MODE: the daystarts flashing on the display;

– press button + or – to set the day.

NOTE The setting increases or decreas-es by one unit each time button + or –is pressed. Hold the button pressed tostart automatic quick increase/ decreaseof the setting. Complete the setting bybriefly pressing the button when the re-quired setting is approached.


12h/24h clock mode(Clock mode)

This function enables setting the screen toeither 12 or 24 hour mode.

Proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: 12h or 24hstarts flashing on the display (dependingon the previously set parameter);



Setting the date (Set Date)

This function enables updating the date(year - month - day).

To update the date proceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: the yearstarts flashing on the display;

– briefly press button + or – to set theyear;

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 28

29

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSUnit - “distance” (Dist. unit)

With this function it is possible to set theunits for distance covered (km or mi).

To set the required unit proceed as fol-lows:

– briefly press button MODE: km or miwill flash on the display (according to pre-vious setting);

– press button + or – for setting;

– briefly press button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the buttonfor long to go back to the standard screenwithout storing settings.

Set this value as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: either km/lor l/100 starts flashing on the display (de-pending on the previously set parameter);



Setting the consumption unit(Consumption)

This function enables setting the unit forthe amount of fuel consumed (km/l, l/100or mpg) depending on the distance unit se-lected (either km or miles - see previousparagraph “Distance Unit”).

If the distance unit set is “km”, the dis-play enables setting of the fuel consump-tion unit (km/l or l/100) depending on theamount of fuel consumed. If the distanceunit set is “mi”, the display shows the fu-el consumption unit in “mpg”.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 29

30

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Adjusting the failure/warningbuzzer volume (Buzzer Volume)

With this function the volume of thebuzzer accompanying any failure/warningindication can be adjusted according to 8levels. To adjust the desired volume pro-ceed as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: the previ-ously set volume “level” starts flashing onthe display;

– press button + or – for selecting the de-sired volume level;


Selecting the language (Language)

The messages can be displayed in the fol-lowing languages: Italian, German, English,Spanish, French, Portuguese.

To set the required language proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MODE: the previ-ously set “language” starts flashing on thedisplay;

– press button + or – for selecting the de-sired language;


Setting the temperature unit(Temp. unit)

This function enables setting of the re-quired temperature unit (either °C or °F).

To set the required unit proceed as fol-lows:

– briefly press button MODE: either °Cor °F starts flashing on the display (de-pending on the previously set parameter);



001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 30

31

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSAdjusting the button volume (Button Vol.)

This function enables setting the volumeof the roger-beep accompanying the acti-vation of buttons MODE, + and – ac-cording to 8 levels.

To adjust the desired volume proceed asfollows:

– briefly press button MODE: the previ-ously set volume “level” starts flashing onthe display;

– press button + or – to set the volumelevel;


S.B.R. buzzer reactivation (Belt Buzzer) (where provided)

This function can only be displayed afterFiat Dealership has deactivated the S.B.R.system (see paragraph “S.B.R. system” insection “Safety devices”).

The indications will appear more fre-quently when there are 200 km left. For1.3 Multijet versions refer to the instruc-tions provided in the “Scheduled Servic-ing Plan” in section “Car Maintenance” forair filter, engine oil and engine oil filter re-placement. The indication will appear inkilometres or miles according to the unitsettings. When the next scheduled ser-vicing is near, the message “Service” willappear on the display followed by thenumber of kilometres or miles or days leftbefore servicing when the key is turned toMAR. The “Scheduled Servicing” messageshows information in either kilometres(km) or miles (mi) or in days (dd) de-pending on the deadline showing up first.Go to the Fiat Dealership where the ser-vicing operations envisaged in the “Sched-uled Service Plan” or “Yearly InspectionPlan” will be performed and the messagewill be reset.

Scheduled Servicing (Service)

This function enables viewing of informa-tion on proper car servicing depending onthe kilometres travelled or daily intervals.

This information is consulted as follows:

– briefly press button MODE: the displayshows service requirements in km or miaccording to the previous setting (seeparagraph “Distance unit”);

– press button + or – to view the serviceinterval in days;

– briefly press button MODE to go backto the menu screen or press the buttonfor a prolonged time to go back to thestandard screen.

Note According to the “Scheduled Ser-vicing Plan” the car must be serviced every20,000 km (or equivalent mileage) or ona yearly basis. This message appears au-tomatically when the key is positioned onMAR after travelling for 2,000 km (orequivalent mileage) or 30 days after thedeadline. It appears every 200 km (orequivalent mileage) or 3 days.

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 31

32

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Passenger front and side airbag activation/deactivation (where provided) (Passenger bag)

This function is used to activate/deactivatethe front passenger’s airbag.

Proceed as follows:

❒ press button MODE: the display showsmessages “Bag pass: Off” (to deactivate)or “Bag pass: On” (to activate). Pressthe buttons + and – followed by buttonMODE again;

❒ the confirmation request message willbe displayed;

❒ press buttons + or – to select eitherYes (to confirm activation/deactivation)or No (to abort);

❒ briefly press button MODE: the displayshows a message confirming the se-lected value. Now, go back to the menuscreen or press the button for a pro-longed time to go back to the standardscreen without storing the settings.

MODE

MODE

MODE

–+

F0H

4271

g

F0H

4272

g

F0H

4273

g

F0H

4275

g

F0H

4274

gF0

H42

76g

F0H

4276

gF0

H42

78g

F0H

4277

g

–+

–+

–+

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 32

33

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSExiting the Menu

This is the last function that closes the set-ting cycle listed in the initial menu screen.

Briefly press button MODE to go back tothe standard screen without storing thesettings.

Press button + to return to the first menuoption (Speed Beep).

Both functions can be reset (to start a newtrip).

The “General Trip” function is used to dis-play information relating to:

– Range

– Trip distance

– Average consumption

– Instant consumption

– Average speed

– Travel time (driving time).

The “Trip B” function is used to display in-formation relating to:

– Trip distance B

– Average consumption B

– Average speed B

– Travel time B (driving time).

Note “Trip B” functions may be disabled(see “Trip B on”). “Range” and “Instan-taneous consumption” cannot be reset.

TRIP COMPUTER(where provided)

General features

The “Trip computer” is used to display in-formation on car operation when the keyis turned to MAR. This function includesa “General trip” system that monitors the“entire mission” (trip) of the car and the“Trip B” system that monitors the partialmission of the car. The former functionis part of the entire mission (as illustrat-ed in fig. 34).

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 33

34

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

New mission

The new mission begins after:

– “manual” resetting by the user, by press-ing the relevant button;

– “automatic” resetting, when the “Tripdistance” reaches 9999.9 km or when the“Travel time” reaches 99.59 (99 hours and59 minutes);

– disconnection/reconnection of the bat-tery.

IMPORTANT The reset operations per-formed after the “General Trip” messageappears are used to also reset the “TripB”, which, on its turn, is used to reset thevalues of the corresponding function.

Travel time

This value shows the time elapsed sincethe start of a new mission.

IMPORTANT If information is not avail-able, the message “----” will appear insteadof the Trip Computer values. Displayingof the values will be resumed regularlywhen normal operation is restored with-out resetting the values displayed beforethe failure nor starting a new mission.

TRIP button fig. 34

Button TRIP located on the top of theright steering column stalk is used (withignition key at MAR) to display and re-set the previously described values to starta new mission:

– short pressing to display the differentvalues;

– long pressing to reset and then start anew mission.

Values displayed

Range

It indicates the distance left to travel basedon the fuel in the tank assuming that dri-ving conditions will not change. The mes-sage “----” will appear on the display in thefollowing cases:

– the range value is below 50 km (30miles) or the fuel level is below 4 litres;

– car left parked with engine running forlong.

Trip distance

This value shows the distance coveredfrom the start of a new mission.

Average consumption

This value shows the average consump-tion from the start of a new mission.

Instant consumption

This indicates the fuel consumption. Thevalue is constantly updated. The message“----” will appear on the display if the caris parked with the engine running.

Average speed

This value shows the car average speed asa function of the overall time elapsed sincethe start of the a mission.

fig. 34 F0H0755m

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 34

35

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSStart of journey procedure

With ignition key at MAR, press and keep button TRIP pressed for over 2 seconds to reset.

Exit TRIP

Exit Trip is performed automatically after having displayed all the related values or by keeping the button MODE pressed for over2 seconds.

Reset TRIP BEnd partial mission

Start new partial missionEnd partial mission

Start new partial mission

Reset TRIP BEnd partial mission

Start new partial mission

Reset GENERAL TRIPEnd entire missionStart new mission

Reset GENERAL TRIPEnd entire missionStart new mission

End partial missionStart new partial mission

Reset TRIP B

Reset TRIP B

TRIP B

TRIP B

TRIP B

GENERAL TRIP

˙

˙

˙

˙

˙

˙ ˙

˙

001-035 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:27 Pagina 35

36

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 35 F0H0737m

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

The steering wheel can be adjusted bothin height A-fig. 35 and axially B.

Proceed as follows:

❒ release the lever pulling it towards thesteering wheel (position 2);

❒ adjust the steering wheel as required;

❒ lock the lever pushing it forwards (po-sition 1).

Any adjustment of the steer-ing wheel position must be

carried out only with the car station-ary and the engine turned off.

WARNING

It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-

market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifica-tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theftdevice) that could badly affect per-formance and safety, cause the lapseof warranty and result in car non-compliance with the regulations inforce.

WARNING

ADJUSTMENTOF THE SEATS

FRONT SEATS

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

Lift the lever A-fig. 36 and push the seatforwards or backwards: in the driving po-sition the arms should rest on the rim ofthe steering wheel.

Always check that the seat is firmly lockedin the runners by trying to move it backand forth.

Seat height adjustment (driver’s side) (where provided)

Move repeatedly lever B-fig. 36 upwardsor downwards to achieve the requiredheight.

IMPORTANT Adjustment must be car-ried out only seated in the driver’s seatwith the car at a standstill.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 36

37

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 36 F0H0041m fig. 37 F0H0042m

Back rest angle adjustment

Move lever D-fig. 37 as shown by the ar-row, set the back rest in the required po-sition, then release the lever.

Lumbar adjustment (where provided)

Turn knob C-fig. 37 clockwise or coun-terclockwise to increase or decrease lum-bar adjustment.

After adjustments, alwayscheck that the seat is firmly

locked in the runners.

WARNING

fig. 38 F0H0043m

fig. 39 F0H0044m

Setting the passenger’s seat to “table” configuration

Set the armrest (where provided) in ver-tical position.

From driver’s seat or rear seats, move thelever A-fig. 39 as shown by the arrow,tilt the back rest on the cushion, then re-lease the lever. In this position the backrest fig. 40 can be used like a table.

Armrest adjustment (where provided) fig. 38

To use the armrest, move it from position1 to position 2.

fig. 40 F0H0045m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 37

38

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 41 F0H0046m

Setting the driver’s seat to “table”configuration

Remove the head restraint completely(see “Head restraint removal” in section“Head restraints”) then follow the previ-ously described procedure.

Seat warming (where provided)

To switch on/off seat warming on driver’sside press button B-fig. 41, press buttonC for the passenger’s side.

The led on the button will light up whenthe function is on.

REAR SLIDING SEAT

Adjustments from inside the car

Moving the seat backwards or forwards fig. 42

Lift lever A or lever B respectively to ad-just the required seat section, then pushthe seat backwards or forwards.

Back rest angle adjustment fig. 43

Use lever C to set the back rest as re-quired then release the lever.

To prevent malfunctioning: always presslever C down completely.

fig. 42 F0H0047m fig. 43 F0H0252m

fig. 44 F0H0253m

REAR FIXED SEAT (where provided)

For tilting the seat, see paragraph “Bootextension”

Adjustments from the boot

Moving the seat backwards or forwards fig. 44

Use handles F and G to adjust the re-quired seat section, then push the seatbackwards or forwards.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 38

39

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

Back rest angle adjustment fig. 45

Use lever A or lever B to adjust the re-quired back rest section, then release thelever.

Central seat back rest adjustmentfrom inside the car

To set the central seat back rest in hori-zontal position:

❒ operate lever D-fig. 47 (one per side)

❒ lower the central seat back rest downcompletely

❒ release the lever.

With central seat back rest completelylowered on the cushion and relevant headrestraint removed (as shown in the figure),it is possible to use the glass holder A-fig. 46 (where provided).

To bring the central back rest back to ver-tical position: use again lever D-fig. 47(one per side) and set it in line with rearside seat backs, until the securing clip Elocks into place.

fig. 45 F0H0049m fig. 46 F0H0051m fig. 47 F0H0050m

After adjustments, alwayscheck that the seat is firmly

locked in the runners.

WARNING

Once you have released thelever, check that the seat is

firmly locked in the runners by tryingto move it back and forth. Failure tolock the seat in place could result inthe seat moving suddenly.

WARNING

Ski tunnel fig. 48

To use the ski tunnel, the armrest shall belowered down completely.

It can be used to carry long objects (e.g.:skis), fitting them into the tunnel from theboot.

To access the ski tunnel B, lower the rearcentral back rest A (as previously de-scribed).

fig. 48 F0H0249m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 39

40

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-

right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourhips.

WARNING

Central seat back rest adjustmentfrom the boot fig. 49

Pull band F and push forward the top ofthe back rest at the same time until re-leasing the locking clip. Bring the back restto horizontal position then, release bandF. Reverse this procedure to reset theback rest in vertical position. Check forclip locking into place.

Always check that loads areanchored properly to pre-

vent them being thrown against thepassengers in case of accident orsharp braking.

WARNING

Only make adjustmentswhen the car is stationary.

WARNINGfig. 49 F0H0255m

Relax position, passenger side

To obtain the relax position, open the reardoor and:

❒ tilt the passenger seat to “table” po-sition fig. 50 (see “Setting the pas-senger’s seat to table configuration” inthis section);

❒ push the rear seat completely forward;

❒ push the passenger’s seat (tilted) com-pletely backward;

❒ remove the rear parcel shelf (see“Rear parcel shelf removal” in this sec-tion);

❒ move the rear seat back rest to the re-quired position fig. 50.

Relax position, driver side

Same procedure but remove completelythe driver’s head restraint (see “Head re-straints” in this section).

IMPORTANT See section “Boot Exten-sion” for operations concerning seat po-sitioning to extend the boot.

fig. 50 F0H0242m

fig. 51 F0H0243m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 40

41

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSHEAD RESTRAINTS

FRONT SEATS

Head restraints are adjustable in height.

To adjust the head restraint height: pullit upwards or press button A-fig. 52 andpush it downwards. Make sure it is prop-erly locked in place.

Head restraint removal

To extract the head restraint press but-ton B-fig. 53.

fig. 52 F0H0052m fig. 53 F0H0237m

fig. 54 F0H0053m

REAR SIDE AND CENTRALHEAD RESTRAINTS (where provided)

Head restraints are adjustable in height.

To raise the head restraints, move themupwards until the locking click is heard.

Press button C-fig. 54 to lower them.

Press button D to extract them (althoughthis is not required for normal configura-tions).

If side-bags are fitted, theuse of seat covers not pur-

chased at Lineaccessori Fiat is dan-gerous.

WARNING

Travelling without head re-straints is dangerous.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 41

42

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSRemember that the head re-straints should be adjusted

to support the back of your head andnot your neck. Only in this positiondo they exert their protective action.

WARNING

To optimise head restraintprotective action, adjust the

seat back upright and keep your headas close as possible to the head re-straint.

WARNING

When refitting the head re-straint, check for proper po-

sitioning and locking.

WARNING

Saddle-shaped rear head re-straints optimise visibility

and shall always be set in the positionof use by rear passengers.

WARNING

REARVIEW MIRRORS

DRIVING MIRROR

The mirror is fitted with a safety devicethat causes it to be released in the eventof a violent crash.

Use lever A-fig. 55 to move it to two dif-ferent positions: normal or antiglare.

CHILD’S WATCH MIRROR(where provided)

It is located on roof longitudinal console,near the front ceiling light to give the dri-ver and front passenger a wide view ofrear seats and therefore to watch rearpassengers (children).

To use this mirror, move it from retract-ed position B-fig. 56 to position C asshown in the figure.

fig. 55 F0H0056m

fig. 56 F0H0057m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 42

43

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSDOOR MIRRORS

Manual adjustment

Use knob A-fig. 57 to adjust the mirror

Electric adjustment

This operation can be only performedwith ignition key to MAR.

Proceed as follows:

❒ use switch B-fig. 58 to select the mir-ror required (left or right);

❒ to adjust the mirror move the switchC in the four directions.

Adjust mirrors with car stationary andhandbrake on.

Mirror defrosting, where provided, startsautomatically when switching the heatedrear window on.

fig. 57 F0H0244m

fig. 58 F0H0058m

fig. 59 F0H0059m

Folding fig. 59

When required (for example when themirror causes difficulty in narrow spaces)it is possible to fold mirrors moving themfrom position 1 to position 2.

When driving the mirrors shallalways be in position (1).

As the driver’s door mirror iscurved, it may slightly alterthe perception of distance.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 43

44

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS HEATING/CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

1 Fixed vents for defrosting/demisting side windows - 2 Side adjustable outlets - 3 Fixed vents for defrosting/demisting windscreen- 4 Centre adjustable outlets - 5 Lower vents - 6 Lower vents for rear passengers.

F0H0738mfig. 60

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 44

45

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 61 F0H0061m

fig. 62 F0H0062m

CENTRAL AND SIDE VENTS fig. 61-62

A Fixed vents for defrosting/demistingside windows

B Control for outlet opening/closing

C Control for directing outlet and airflow.

F0H0063m

HEATING AND VENTILATION

CONTROLS

A fan activation and speed control knob

B air temperature knob (mixing hot and cold air)

C heated rear window on/off button

D air distribution knob

E air recirculation on/off button.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 45

46

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS AIR DISTRIBUTION

Using knob D-fig. 63 it is possible tochoose manually 5 of the possible air dis-tributions to the passenger compartment:

« air flow from centre and side vents (2)and (4) fig. 60;

Δ air flow from centre and side vents (2)and (4) and downwards (5) and (6) fig.60 (bilevel function);

≈ air flow downwards (5) and (6) fig. 60;

ƒ air flow downwards (5) and (6) fig. 60and also to the windscreen (3);

- to demist and defrost windscreen (3)and front side windows (1) fig. 60.

TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

Proceed as follows:

Turn knob B-fig. 63 clockwise (pointerto red sector) to increase temperature orturn it counter-clockwise to decreasetemperature;

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Proceed as follows:

❒ open completely central (4) and side(2) fig. 60 vents;

❒ turn knob B-fig. 63 to the blue sec-tor;

❒ set A to the required speed;

❒ set knob D to «;

❒ set knob E to Ú to turn air recir-culation off

RECIRCULATION

Set knob E to ….

This function is particularly useful whenthe outside air is heavily polluted (in a traf-fic jam, tunnel, etc.). However, it is bet-ter not to use it for long periods, espe-cially if there are several people in the carto prevent window steaming up.

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster. Do not use the air recirculationfunction on rainy/cold days as it wouldconsiderably increase the possibility of thewindows misting inside.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 46

47

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSQUICK HEATING

Proceed as follows:

❒ close all dashboard vents;

❒ turn knob B-fig. 63 to the red sector;

❒ turn knob A to 4 -;

❒ turn knob D to ≈.

QUICK WINDSCREEN ANDFRONT SIDE WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING

Proceed as follows:



❒ turn knob D to ≈;

❒ set knob E to Ú to turn air recir-culation off.

After demisting/defrosting, operate nor-mal controls to restore the required com-fort.

Preventive demisting procedure

In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and out-side the passenger compartment, performthe following preventive demisting proce-dure:

❒ set knob E-fig. 63 to Ú to turn airrecirculation off;

❒ knob pointer B in the red section;

❒ turn knob A to 2;

❒ turn knob D to - or to ƒ if the win-dows do not mist up.

REAR WINDOW AND ELECTRICDOOR MIRRORDEMISTING/DEFROSTING (where provided)

Press button C-fig. 63 to turn this func-tion on. When this function is on, the but-ton led turns on.

This function is timed and switches off au-tomatically after the preset time. To cutout this function press again button C.

IMPORTANT Do not apply stickers onthe inside of the rear window over theheating filaments to avoid damage thatmight cause it to stop working properly.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 47

48

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM (where provided)

AIR DISTRIBUTION fig. 64

Using knob E-fig. 64 it is possible to choose manu-ally 5 of the possible air distributions to the passen-ger compartment:

« air flow from central vents and side outlets (2)and (4) fig. 60;

Δ air flow from centre and side vents (2) and (4)and downwards (5) and (6) fig. 60 (bilevel func-tion);

≈ air flow downwards (5) and (6) fig. 60;

ƒ air flow downwards (5) and (6) and also to thewindscreen (3) fig. 60;

- to demist and defrost windscreen (3) and frontside windows (1) fig. 60.

CONTROLS fig. 64

A fan activation and speed control knob

B air temperature knob (mixing hot and cold air)

C heated rear window on/off button

D climate control compressor on/off button;

E air distribution selection knob

F air recirculation on/off button.

F0H0064mfig. 64

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 48

49

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSTEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT

Proceed as follows:

Turn knob B-fig. 64 clockwise (pointerto red sector) to increase temperature orturn it counter-clockwise to decreasetemperature;

FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Proceed as follows:

❒ open completely central (4) and side(2) fig. 60 vents;

❒ turn knob B-fig. 64 to the blue sec-tor;

❒ set A to the required speed;

❒ set knob E to «;

❒ set knob F to Ú to turn air recir-culation off.

RECIRCULATION

Set knob F-fig. 64 to Ú.

This function is particularly useful whenthe outside air is heavily polluted (in a traf-fic jam, tunnel, etc.). However, it is bet-ter not to use it for long periods, espe-cially if there are several people in the carto prevent window steaming up.

IMPORTANT The inside air recirculationsystem makes it possible to reach the re-quired “heating” or “cooling” conditionsfaster. Do not use the air recirculationfunction on rainy/cold days as it wouldconsiderably increase the possibility of thewindows misting inside.

QUICK HEATING

Proceed as follows:

❒ close all dashboard vents;



❒ turn knob E to «.

QUICK WINDSCREEN ANDFRONT SIDE WINDOWDEMISTING/DEFROSTING

Proceed as follows:



❒ turn knob E to «;

❒ set knob F to Ú to turn air recir-culation off.

After demisting/defrosting, operate thecontrols to restore the required comfort.

Preventive demisting procedure

In the event of considerable outside mois-ture and/or rain and/or considerable dif-ferences in temperature inside and out-side the passenger compartment, performthe following preventive demisting proce-dure:

❒ set knob F-fig. 64 to Ú to turn airrecirculation off;

❒ turn knob B to the red sector;

❒ turn knob A to 2;

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 49

50

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS ❒ turn knob E to - or to ƒ if the win-dows do not mist up.

IMPORTANT Climate control is very use-ful to speed up window demisting: there-fore, perform demisting procedure as de-scribed previously and then switch the sys-tem on pressing button D.

REAR WINDOW AND ELECTRICDOOR MIRRORDEMISTING/DEFROSTING(where provided)

Press button C-fig. 64 to turn this func-tion on. When this function is on, the but-ton led turns on.

This function is timed and switches off au-tomatically after the preset time. To cutout this function press again button C.


CLIMATE CONTROL (cooling and dehumidification)

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn knob B-fig. 64 to the blue sec-tor to select temperature;

❒ turn knob A to the required speed;

❒ set knob E to «;

❒ set knob F to ….

❒ press D √ (button led will turn on).

Cooling adjustment

Proceed as follows:

❒ set knob F-fig. 64 to Ú to turn airrecirculation off;

❒ turn knob B to the right to raise tem-perature;

❒ turn knob A to the left to reduce thefan speed.

LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM

During the winter, the climate control sys-tem must be turned on at least once amonth for about ten minutes. Before sum-mer, have the system checked at a FiatDealership.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 50

51

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSAUTOMATIC TWO-ZONE CLIMATECONTROL SYSTEM(where provided)

GENERAL

The car is fitted with a two-zone climatecontrol system which makes it possible toseparately adjust the air temperature onthe driver’s side and on the passenger’sside. Temperature control is based on the“equivalent temperature” logic, i.e.: thesystem continuously works to keep con-stant the comfort inside the passengercompartment and to compensate any vari-ation of the outside climate conditions, in-cluding sunshine detected by a proper sen-sor provided for the purpose.

The climate control system automaticallycontrols and adjusts the following para-meters and functions:

❒ air temperature at driver/front pas-senger vents;

❒ air distribution at driver/front passen-ger vents;

❒ fan speed (continuous air flow varia-tion);

❒ compressor switching on (to cool/de-humidify air);

❒ air recirculation.

All the above functions can be changedmanually at any time, i.e.: you can alwaysmodify one or more function settings. Inthis event, the system will no longer im-plement the automatic control of the func-tions changed manually (except for safetyreasons, e.g.: risk of window misting).

Manual selections prevail over automaticones and remain in storage until the userdecides to resume automatic control, ex-cept when the system cuts in for particu-lar safety conditions.

The control of functions not changed man-ually remains automatic.

The amount of air admitted to the pas-senger compartment does not depend onthe car speed, since it is electronically con-trolled by the fan.

In any case, the temperature of the air ad-mitted to the passenger compartment iscontrolled automatically (except when thesystem is off) according to the tempera-tures set on the driver’s and front pas-senger’s displays or under certain climat-ic conditions if the compressor is off).

The system enables to set or to changethe following parameters and functionsmanually:

❒ air temperatures on driver/front pas-senger side;

❒ fan speed (continuous variation);

❒ air distribution on five levels (driver/front passenger side);

❒ climate control compressor on/off en-able;

❒ monozone/two-zone distribution pri-ority;

❒ fast demisting/defrosting;

❒ air recirculation;

❒ rear heated window;

❒ system off;

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 51

52

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

CONTROLS fig. 65

A MONO function button (for aligning set temperatures)

B climate control compressor on/off button

C inside air recirculation on/off button

D display showing climate control system data

E climate control system off button

F MAX-DEF function button (front window fast defrosting/demisting)

G rear window heating on/off button

H AUTO function button (automatic mode) and knob to adjust temperature onpassenger side

I buttons for air distribution on passenger side

F0H0065m

L button for adjusting fan speed

M button for air distribution on driverside

N AUTO function button (automaticmode) and knob to adjust tempera-ture on driver side

SWITCHING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM ON

The system can be started in differentways, but it is advisable to press one of theAUTO buttons and then to turn theknobs to set the temperatures requiredon the display.

It is possible to personalise required tem-peratures (driver and passenger) with amaximum difference of 7 °C.

This way the system will start workingcompletely automatically to reach thetemperatures set as quickly as possible.The system will adjust the air temperature,flow and distribution and will control theair recirculation function and the condi-tioner compressor on/off.

fig. 65

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 52

53

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSDuring fully automatic operation, the on-ly manual settings required are the fol-lowing:

❒ MONO, to align the air temperatureand distribution set on the passenger’sside (front or rear) with that on thedriver’s side;

❒ …, air recirculation, to keep it al-ways on or off;

❒ -, to speed up demisting/defrostingof windscreen, front side windows,rear window and door mirrors;

❒ (, to demist/defrost the rear heat-ed window and the door mirrors.

During completely automatic system op-eration, the temperatures, air distributionand the fan speed set can be changed atany time through the relevant buttons orknobs: the system will automaticallychange its settings to adjust to the new re-quirements.

During full automatic operation (FULLAUTO), any change in air distributionand/or air flow and/or compressor turn-ing on and/or air recirculation will obtainFULL disappearing. In this way functionswill be controlled manually until pressingthe AUTO button again. The fan speed isthe same for all passenger compartmentareas.

With one or more functions engaged man-ually, the adjustment of the temperatureof the air admitted to the passenger com-partment continues to be controlled au-tomatically by the system, except with theclimate control compressor off. In fact, inthis condition, the air admitted to the pas-senger compartment cannot have a low-er temperature than the outside air.

CONTROLS

Air temperatureadjustment knobsH-N

Turning the knobs clock-wise or counterclock-wise, highers or lowersthe temperature of theair required respectivelyin the left zone (knob N)or right zone (knob H)of the passenger com-partment.

It is possible to personalise required tem-peratures (driver and passenger) with amaximum difference of 7 °C.

The temperatures set are shown on thedisplays near the relevant knobs.

Pressing button A (MONO) automati-cally aligns the temperature on the frontpassenger’s side with that on the driver’sside. It is therefore possible to set thesame temperature between the two zonessimply turning the knob on the driver’sside (N).

This function is provided to simplify tem-perature adjustment of the whole pas-senger compartment when only the dri-ver is on board.

Separate operation of the set tempera-tures is automatically restored by turningknobs (H) or pressing button A(MONO) again when the button led is on.

Turning the knobs clockwise or counter-clockwise until they reach the extreme se-lections HI or LO, the maximum heat-ing or cooling functions are respectivelyengaged:

❒ HI function (highest heating power):

this is activated by turning the tempera-ture knob clockwise above the max. val-ue (32 °C). It can be activated indepen-dently from the driver’s or passenger’sside or both (also selecting the MONOfunction).

This function can be engaged when re-quiring to heat the passenger compart-ment as quickly as possible, exploiting themaximum potential of the system. Thisfunction uses the maximum temperatureof the coolant fluid, while air distributionand fan speed are controlled according tothe system settings.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 53

54

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS More particularly, max. fan speed will notbe immediately engaged if coolant is nothot enough; this to prevent admitting airthat is not warm enough to the passengercompartment.

All manual settings are however possiblewith this function on.

To switch the function off, simply turn thetemperature knob counterclockwise andset the required temperature.

❒ LO function (highest cooling power):

this is activated by turning the tempera-ture knob counterclockwise below themin. value (16 °C). It can be activated in-dependently from the driver’s or passen-ger’s side or both (also selecting theMONO function).

This function can be engaged when re-quiring to cool the passenger compart-ment as quickly as possible, exploiting themaximum potential of the system. Thisfunction engages inside air recirculationand climate control compressor, while airdistribution and fan speed are controlledaccording to environmental conditions.

All manual settings are however possiblewith this function on.

To switch the function off, simply turn thetemperature knob clockwise and set therequired temperature.

Front airdistributionselection buttons(I-M)Pressing the relevantbuttons it is possible tomanually choose one ofthe five possible air dis-tributions to the left andright side of the passen-ger compartment:

▲ Air flow to the windscreen and frontside window vents to demist or de-frost them.

˙ Air flow to dashboard central andside vents to provide satisfactoryventilation to the chest and face,specially during the summer.

▼ Air flow towards the front and rearlower parts of the passenger com-partment. Due to the natural ten-dency of heat to spread upwards,this type of distribution allows heat-ing of the passenger compartmentin the shortest time, also giving aprompt feeling of warmth to thecoldest parts of the body.

˙▼

Splitting of the air flow between thevents to the lower part of the pas-senger compartment (warmest air)and the dashboard centre and sideoutlets (coolest air). This air flowdistribution is particularly useful inspring and autumn, when the sun isshining.

▲▼ Splitting of the air flow between the

lower part of the passenger com-partment and the windscreen andfront side window demisting/de-frosting vents. This type of air dis-tribution allows satisfactory heatingof the passenger compartment whilepreventing possible misting of thewindows.

Set air flow distribution is indicated by thecorresponding button led switching on.With a combined function set, pressing abutton will turn on the main function ofthe button pressed, together with thefunctions set yet. Pressing the button ofthe active function will turn the functionoff (led off).To restore automatic air distribution con-trol after a manual selection, press buttonAUTO.When the driver selects air distributiontowards the windscreen, also the air dis-tribution on passenger’s side will auto-matically be directed to the windscreen.The passenger can however select a dif-ferent air distribution by pressing the rel-evant buttons.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 54

55

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSFan speedadjustment buttons (L)

Pressing the ends of but-ton p increases or de-creases the fan speed

and therefore the amount of air admittedto the passenger compartment, althoughkeeping the required temperature.

The fan speed is shown by the lit bars onthe display

❒ max fan speed = all bars lit

❒ min fan speed = one bar lit.

The fan can be cut off only if the climatecontrol compressor has been switched offpressing button B.

IMPORTANT To restore automatic fanspeed control after a manual adjustment,press button AUTO.

AUTO buttons (H-N)(automaticoperation)

Pressing the AUTObutton (on driver and/orfront passenger side) thesystem automatically ad-justs the amount and dis-tribution of the air ad-mitted to the passengercompartment, cancelling

all the previous manual adjustments.

This condition is indicated by the messageFULL AUTO on the front system dis-play.

Manual operation of at least one automaticfunction (air recirculation, air distribution,fan speed or climate control compressoroff) will cause FULL message going off thedisplay. This means that automatic controlis not complete (except temperature con-trol which is always automatic).

IMPORTANT Should the system (aftermanual settings) be no longer able to guar-antee the required temperature set in thepassenger compartment, the set temper-ature value will start flashing to indicatethis condition, after one minute the AU-TO message will turn off.

To restore automatic system control af-ter one or more manual selections, pressbutton AUTO.

MONO button (A)(alignment of settemperatures andair distribution)

Pressing button MONOautomatically aligns the temperature onthe front passenger’s side with that on thedriver’s side.

It is therefore possible to set the sametemperature and air distribution betweenthe two zones simply turning the knob onthe driver’s side. This function is provid-ed to simplify temperature adjustment ofthe whole passenger compartment whenonly the driver is on board.

Separate operation of the set tempera-tures and air distribution is automaticallyrestored by turning knob H-fig. 65 orpressing button MONO A again whenthe button led is on.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 55

56

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS Air recirculationon/off button (C)

Air recirculation is con-trolled according to thefollowing operating log-ics:

❒ forced switching on (air recirculationalways on), indicated by the turning onof the led on button C-fig. 65 andsymbol í on the display;

❒ forced switching off (air recirculationalways off with air inlet from the out-side), indicated by the turning off ofthe button led and êon the display.

These operating conditions are obtainedpressing in sequence the air recirculationbutton C.

After a preset time, the climate controlsystem will turn air recirculation off au-tomatically for safety reasons, thus en-abling outside air inlet.

IMPORTANT The air recirculation systemmakes it possible to reach the requiredheating or cooling conditions faster. It is however inadvisable to use it onrainy/cold days as it would considerablyincrease the possibility of the windowsmisting inside, especially if the climate con-trol system is off.

When the outside temperature is below5-7°C, air recirculation is switched off (airis taken from the outside) to prevent mist-ing.

Climate controlcompressor on/offbutton (B)

Press the √ button,when the button led ison, to switch the com-

pressor off. The led will go off. By press-ing again the button when the led is off,the system automatic control of the com-pressor activation is restored; this condi-tion is indicated by button led lighting up.

When the air conditioner compressor isoff, the system deactivates air recircula-tion to prevent window misting up. Al-though the system is still able to maintainthe required temperature, the messageFULL on the display will go off. If the sys-tem is no longer able to keep the requiredtemperature, also the message AUTOwill turn off.

IMPORTANT Air at a temperature low-er than that of the outside air cannot belet into the passenger compartment whenthe compressor is off. Furthermore, inparticular environmental conditions, thewindows could mist up fast because theair is no longer dehumidified.

Setting will be stored also when the en-gine is stopped. Either press again button√ (in this case the system operates asheater only) or AUTO to reset auto-matic control of the compressor.

With compressor off, if the outside tem-perature is higher than the set tempera-ture, the system cannot reach the re-quired temperature. This will be signalledby the flashing of set temperature value onthe display for a few seconds, then themessage AUTO will go off.

When the compressor is off, it is possi-ble to reset manually the fan speed (no bardisplayed).

When the compressor is on and the en-gine is running, fan speed cannot be low-er than the minimum (one bar displayed).

It is inadvisable to use the airrecirculation feature with

low outside temperature as the win-dows might mist over quickly.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 56

57

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSButton for fastwindscreen andfront side windowdemisting/defrosting (F)

Press this button: the climate control sys-tem will automatically switch on all thefunctions required for fast windscreen andfront side window demisting/defrosting,that is:❒ climate control system compressor

on (with proper climatic conditions);❒ air recirculation off;❒ maximum air temperature HI on

both areas;❒ fan speed according to engine coolant

temperature in order to limit lettingcold air into the passenger compart-ment for demisting the windows;

❒ air flow directed to the windscreenand front side window vents;

❒ heated rear window.

IMPORTANT The fast windscreendemisting/defrosting function stays on forapprox. 3 minutes after the engine coolanttemperature exceeds 50°C (petrol ver-sions) or 35°C (Multijet versions).

When the max. demisting/defrosting func-tion is on, the led on the relevant buttonand that on the heated rear window but-ton turn on. Message FULL AUTO onthe display will turn off.

When the max. demisting/defrosting func-tion is on, the only manual operations pos-sible are manual adjustment of the fan andswitching rear window heating off.

Press button F-fig. 65 or air recirculationbutton C or compressor button B orAUTO buttons N o H to reset the pre-vious system operation conditions.

Button fordemisting/defrostingthe heated rearwindow and doormirrors (G)

Press this button to switch on the heat-ed rear window demisting/defrosting func-tion. The led on the button will come on.

This function will be automaticallyswitched off after the preset time, orpressing the button again or when stop-ping the engine. It will not start up auto-matically when the engine is started again.


OFF button (E)(system off)

To switch the climatecontrol system off, pressbutton E, also the dis-play will go off.

The climate control system conditionswhen the system is off are the following:❒ Every led off;❒ set temperatures not displayed;❒ air recirculation on, thus isolating

the passenger compartment;❒ climate control system compressor

off;❒ fan off.

The heated rear window can be switchedon and off normally when the system is offby pressing button G.

IMPORTANT The climate control systemelectronic unit stores the system settingsmade before the system was switched offand restores them as soon as a button ispressed (with the exception of the heat-ed rear window button). The functionwhich the button corresponds to will beswitched on, if it was off when the sys-tem was switched off. It will be kept if, onthe other hand, it was on when the sys-tem was switched off.

Press the AUTO button to switch the cli-mate control system back on.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 57

58

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS EXTERNAL LIGHTS

The left-hand lever includes the controlsfor the external lights.

The external lights can only be switchedon when the ignition key is at MAR.

LIGHTS OFF fig. 66

Knurled ring turned to position å.

SIDE/TAILLIGHTS fig. 67

Turn the knurled ring to position 6.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentpanel comes on at the same time.

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 68

Turn the knurled ring to position 2.

The warning light 3 on the instrumentpanel comes on at the same time.

BEAM HEADLIGHTS fig. 69

When the knurled ring is in position 2pull the lever towards the steering wheel(stable position). The warning light 1 onthe instrument panel comes on at thesame time.

To turn the beam headlights off, pull againthe lever towards the steering wheel(dipped beams will turn on again).

FLASHING THE HEADLIGHTS

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(unstable position) regardless of the po-sition of the knurled ring. The warninglight 1 on the instrument panel willcome on at the same time.

Parking lights fig. 67

With the ignition key in position STOPor removed, rotate knurled ring in posi-tion 6. The warning light 3 is lit on theinstrument panel and all the plate lightsand side/taillights go on. Move the levera upwards to turn on the lights on theright-hand side; move it downwards b toturn on the lights on the left-hand side. Inboth cases the warning light 3 on theinstrument panel does not turn on.

fig. 66 F0H0066m

fig. 69 F0H0069m

fig. 68 F0H0068m

fig. 67 F0H0067m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 58

59

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS


DIRECTION INDICATORS fig. 70

Push the stalk to (stable) position:

❒ up (position 1): right-hand indicatorON;

❒ down (position 2): left-hand indicatorON.

Warning light For D start flashing on theinstrument panel.

Indicators are switched off automaticallywhen the steering wheel is straightened.

If you want the indicator to flash brieflyto show that you are about to changelane, move the stalk up or down withoutclicking into position (unstable position).When released, the stalk will return toits home position.

“FOLLOW ME HOME” DEVICE fig. 71

This function allows the illumination of thespace in front of the car for a preset pe-riod of time.

Activation

With the ignition key on STOP orremoved, pull the stalk towards thesteering wheel within 2 minutes fromwhen the engine is turned off.

At each single movement of the stalk,the time in which the lights stay on isextended by 30 seconds up to maximum210 seconds. After this time, the lightsgo off automatically.

AUTOMATIC LIGHT SENSORS(dusk sensor) (where provided)

This sensor detects any changes in theexternal brightness according to thesensitivity of the set light level: the high-er the sensitivity, the lower the amountof external light needed to switch thelights on. The sensitivity of the dusk sen-sor is adjusted by means of the “Setupmenu” on the “Multifunctional Display”.

Activation

Rotate the knurled ring in position 2A

fig. 72 as to cause automatic switchingon of the side/tail lights and low beamlights simultaneously depending on theexternal brightness.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 59

60

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS WINDOW WASHING

WINDSCREENWASHER/WIPER

The device can work only when the igni-tion key is on MAR.

The right lever fig. 74 can take five dif-ferent positions:

A windscreen wiper off

B intermittent.

With the lever in position B, turn theknurled ring F to select one of four dif-ferent speeds for the intermittent opera-tion mode:, = very slow intermittence-- = slow intermittence--- = mean intermittence---- = fast intermittence

When the automatic light sensor is acti-vated, the multifunctional display showsthe pre-set sensor sensitivity level. On thisscreen it is possible to adjust the sensi-tivity level using the buttons + and – (seefig. 73).

Deactivation

The main beam headlights will go out fol-lowed by the side/tail lights after approx-imately 10 seconds, when the sensor is de-activated.

If the beam headlights are enabled (man-ually by the driver) during automatic light-ing, the beam lights go off automaticallyalong with the lights.

IMPORTANT The sensor cannot detectthe presence of fog. So, in foggy condi-tions, switch the lights on manually.

fig. 73 F0H0736m

fig. 74 F0H0073m

C continuous slow operation;

D continuous fast operation

E temporary fast operation (unstable po-sition).

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 60

61

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSOperation in position E is limited to thetime during which the lever is kept in thatposition manually. When released, thestalk will return to position A and thewiper will be automatically stopped.

IMPORTANT Replace wiper blades asspecified in section “Car maintenance”.

RAIN SENSOR (where provided)

The rain sensor is located behind the dri-ving mirror in contact with the windscreenand has the purpose of automatically ad-just the frequency of the windscreenwiper strokes as to the rain intensity.

IMPORTANT Keep the window clean inthe sensor area.

Activation

Move the right lever down by one click.

The activation of the rain sensor is sig-nalled by a control acquisition “stroke”.

Turn the knurled ring F-fig. 76 to increasethe rain sensor sensitivity.

The increase of the sensitivity of the rainsensor is signalled by a control and acqui-sition “stroke”.

By operating the windscreen washer withthe rain sensor enabled, a smart washingcycle is carried out, without the addition-al stroke after 5 seconds; once complet-ed, the sensor resumes its regular auto-matic operation.

“Smart washing” function fig. 75

Pull the stalk towards the steering wheel(unstable position) to operate the wind-screen washer.

Keeping the stalk pulled for more than halfa second, with just one movement it ispossible to operate the washer jet and thewiper at the same time.

When releasing the stalk, the jet stops im-mediately, while the wiper carries out an-other four strokes.

A further stroke after 6 seconds com-pletes the wiping operation.

Do not use the windscreenwiper to remove layers ofsnow or ice from the wind-screen. In such conditions, the

windscreen wiper may be subjected toexcessive stress and the motor protec-tion which prevents operation for a fewseconds may trip. If the issue persists,contact the Fiat Dealership.

fig. 75 F0H0074m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 61

62

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS The sensor reactivation is signalled by awindscreen wiper “stroke”.

The rain sensor is able to recognize andautomatically adjust itself in the presenceof the following particular conditions:

❒ impurities on the controlled surface(salt, dirt, etc.);

❒ difference between day and night.

Deactivation

Change the stalk knurled ring positionfrom B or turn the ignition key to STOP.

At the next start-up (key at MAR), thesensor will not be reactivated even if thestalk is at B. To activate the sensor, movethe stalk to position A or C and then toposition B or turn the sensitivity adjust-ment knurled ring.

fig. 76 F0H0073m

Streaks of water may causeunnecessary blade moving.

WARNINGWith windscreen wiper on and reversegear engaged, rear window wiping will becontinuous.

Pushing the stalk towards the dashboard(unstable position) will activate the rearwindow washer.

Keeping the stalk pushed for over half asecond will activate also the rear windowwiper.

Releasing the stalk will activate the smartwashing function as described for thewindscreen wiper.

fig. 77 F0H0075m

REAR WINDOW WASHER/WIPER fig. 77

The device can work only when the igni-tion key is on MAR.

Turning the knurled ring A from positionå to position ' will operate the rearwindow wiper as follows:

❒ intermittent operation if the wind-screen wiper is off;

❒ synchronised with the windscreenwiper (but with half stroke frequency);

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 62

63

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSCRUISE CONTROL(where provided)

It is a device able to support the driver,with electronic control, which allows dri-ving at speed over 30 km/h on long andstraight dry roads (e.g.: motorways), at adesired speed, without pressing the ac-celerator pedal. Therefore it is not sug-gested to use this device on extra-urbanroads with traffic. Do not use it in town.

DEVICE ENGAGEMENT

Turn knurled ring A-fig. 78 to ON.

The device may only be engaged in the 4thor 5th gear. Travelling downhill with thedevice engaged, the car speed may in-crease more than the memorised one.

When the device is activated, the warninglight Üon the instrument cluster turns ontogether with the message (where pro-vided) on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay.

fig. 78 F0H0074m

TO MEMORISE SPEED

Proceed as follows:

❒ turn the knurled ring A-fig. 78 toON and press the accelerator pedalto the required speed;

❒ move the stalk upwards (+) for atleast three seconds, then release it.The car speed is memorised and it istherefore possible to release theaccelerator pedal.

In the case of need (when overtaking forinstance) acceleration is possible simplypressing the accelerator pedal: releasingthe accelerator pedal, the car will returnto the speed memorised previously.

TO RESET THE MEMORISEDSPEED

If the device has been disengaged for ex-ample pressing the brake or clutch pedal,the memorised speed can be reset as fol-lows:

❒ accelerate gradually until reaching aspeed approaching the one memo-rised;

❒ engage the gear selected at the timeof speed memorising (4th or 5th gear);

❒ press the RES button B-fig. 78.

TO INCREASE THE MEMORISEDSPEED

The speed memorised can be increased intwo ways:

❒ pressing the accelerator and thenmemorising the new speed reached;

or

❒ moving the stalk upwards (+).

Each operation of the stalk will corre-spond to a slight increase in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the stalk upwardscontinuously will correspond to a contin-uous speed increase.

When travelling with the de-vice on, do not put the gear-

box lever in neutral.

ATTENZIONE

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 63

64

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS TO REDUCE MEMORISEDSPEED

The speed memorised can be increased intwo ways:

❒ disengaging the device and thenmemorising the new speed;

or

❒ moving the stalk downwards (–) untilreaching the new speed which will bememorised automatically.

Each operation of the stalk will corre-spond to a slight reduction in speed (about1 km/h), while keeping the stalk down-wards continuously will correspond to acontinuous speed reduction.

DEVICE DISENGAGEMENT

Turn the ring A-fig. 78 to OFF or the ig-nition key to STOP. The device is auto-matically deactivated also in one of the fol-lowing cases:

❒ pressing the brake or clutch pedal.

In the event of device mal-function or failure, turn the

knurled ring A to OFF and contact aFiat Dealership after checking theprotective fuse integrity.

WARNING

CEILING LIGHTS

FRONT CEILING LIGHT fig. 79

Press switch A to switch the light on andoff.

With switch A in the central position,lights C and D turn on/off when the frontdoors are opened/closed.

Pressing switch A to the left, lights C andD stay off.

Pressing switch A to the right, lights C andD stay on.

fig. 79 F0H0077m

Light switching on/off is progressive.

Switch B turns on the spot light; when theceiling light is off, it turns on singularly:

❒ map reading light C if pressed to theleft;

❒ map reading light D if pressed to theright.

IMPORTANT Make sure that bothswitches are in central position before get-ting out of the car. This will ensure thatthe ceiling lights go out when the doorsare closed preventing the battery fromrunning down.

Anyway, if the switch is left on, the ceil-ing light will automatically switch off after15 minutes from the engine turning off.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 64

65

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSCeiling light timing

Two timing strategies are available in or-der to facilitate getting in and out of thecar, especially at night in dark areas:

TIMING FOR GETTING INTO THE CAR

The ceiling lights will come on as follows:

❒ for about 10 seconds when a door isunlocked;

❒ for about 3 minutes when a door isopened;

❒ for about 10 seconds when a door isclosed (within the 3 minutes).

Timing will be stopped when the ignitionkey is turned to MAR.

TIMING FOR GETTING OUT OF THE CAR

The ceiling lights will come on as followswhen the key is removed from the igni-tion switch:

❒ for about 10 seconds within 2 min-utes after stopping the engine;

❒ for about 3 minutes when a door isopened;

❒ for about 10 seconds when a door isclosed (within the three minutes).

The timeout will automatically end whenthe doors are locked.

fig. 80 F0H0078m fig. 81 F0H0079m

fig. 82 F0H0254m

REAR CEILING LIGHT (where provided)

The light turns on/off pressing the trans-parent to the right or left as illustrated fig. 80-81.

If there is a console placed longitudinallyto the roof, the ceiling light is integratedin the console fig. 81.

If the car is fitted with sunroof, there aretwo 5W ceiling lights on the rear roof fig. 82.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 65

66

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS CONTROLS

HAZARD LIGHTS fig. 83-84

Press switch A regardless of the positionof the ignition key.

The switch will flash with the instrumentpanel warning light Î ¥ when the deviceis on.

Press the switch again to switch the lightsoff.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where provided) fig. 85

These are turned on pressing button 5.

They are turned off pressing the buttonagain or turning the sidelights off.

REAR FOG LIGHTS fig. 86

These are turned on, with the dippedbeam headlights or front fog lights on,pressing button 4.

They are turned off pressing the buttonagain or turning off the dipped beam head-lights or front fog lights.

fig. 83 F0H0080m

fig. 84 F0H0081m

fig. 85 F0H0739m

Use the hazard warninglights in compliance with lo-

cal regulations.

WARNING

fig. 86 F0H0740m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 66

67

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSINERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFFSWITCH

It is located next to the passenger’s doorpillar, at the bottom (move the coveringaside to reach it) and it comes into oper-ation in the case of a crash by cutting offfuel and switching off the engine.

When the fuel cut-off switch is on, warn-ing light è (if any) comes on together withthe message on the multifunction recon-figurable display.

Carefully inspect the car to find fuel leaks,e.g. in the engine compartment, under thecar or near the tank.

If no fuel leaks are found and the car canbe started again, press button A-fig. 87to reset the fuel system and the lights.

After a crash, remember to turn the igni-tion key to STOP to prevent battery run-down.

fig. 87 F0H0741m

If, after an accident, you cansmell petrol or see that the

fuel feed system is leaking, to avoidthe risk of fire, do not reset theswitch.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 67

68

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS INTERIOR EQUIPMENT

UPPER GLOVEBOX

Operate handle A-fig. 88-89 to releasethe cover and lift it to a stable open posi-tion.

ROOF ODDMENTCOMPARTMENT (where fitted)

To use the compartments with “calipers”fig. 90 opening, press the relevant buttonsin the direction shown by the arrow.

fig. 88 F0H0713m

fig. 89 F0H0087m

fig. 90 F0H0152m

Do not travel with the gloveboxes open: risk of passen-

ger’s injury in case of accident.

WARNING

Compartment C-fig. 93 and DIN com-partment D, located in the dashboard, arein central position.

The DIN compartment D can be removedto install the sound system of the Lineac-cessori Fiat.

fig. 91 F0H0088m

ODDMENT COMPARTMENTS

Compartment A-fig. 91, located in thedashboard, is in front of the front passen-ger.

Compartment B-fig. 92, located in thedashboard, is on the steering wheel left-hand side.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 68

69

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 93 F0H0090m

fig. 92 F0H0714m

DOOR POCKETS fig. 94

Each door has a pocket/oddment com-partment.

GLASS/CAN HOLDER fig. 95

The central console houses the glass/canholders in front of the handbrake.

Cargo box (where provided) fig. 96

It is made up of a special preformed ele-ment, which is placed in the boot for carswith non sliding rear seat and can be usedto house objects; this element providesload plane uniform level with depressedseat back.

MAGNETIC CARD/TICKETSLOTS fig. 97

The slots for holding magnetic cards andtickets (phone card, toll slips, etc.) can befound on the central tunnel unit.

fig. 94 F0H0153m fig. 95 F0H0091m

fig. 96 F0H0349m

fig. 97 F0H0092m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 69

70

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 98 F0H0093m

ROOF SHELF fig. 98

This shelf was designed to facilitate quickstorage of light objects (e.g.: documents,road map, etc.).

IMPORTANT Do not put heavy objectson the shelf and do not lean on it.

The shelf is an alternative to the sunroof.

fig. 99 F0H0236m fig. 100 F0H0094m

REAR CD COMPARTMENTWITH GLASS/CAN HOLDER fig. 99

On the central console, behind the hand-brake, there is a CD compartment withglass/can holder.

OUTLETS (12V)

They work only with the ignition key atMAR.

Outlet A-fig. 100 is at the front

If the smokers’ kit is fitted, the socket Ais replaced by the lighter.

Where provided, the car can be fitted withoutlet C-fig. 101, also on the luggagecompartment left-hand side.

fig. 101 F0H0154m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 70

71

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSSMOKER’S KIT (where provided)

Cigar lighter

It is located on the central console fig. 102, at the side of the handbrakelever.

With the ignition key at MAR, press thebutton; after about 15 seconds the buttonwill return to its initial position and readyfor use.

IMPORTANT Always check that the cig-ar lighter has turned off.

Ashtray fig. 102

It consists of a removable plastic contain-er with spring opening which can be po-sitioned in the glass/can holder located onthe central console.

IMPORTANT Do not use the ashtray aswaste paper basket: it might set on fire incontact with cigarette stubs.

SUN VISORS

These are positioned to the sides of therear-view mirror. They can swing to thesides and up or down.

According to versions, the back of the sunvisor can be fitted with a courtesy mirror.Open the sliding wing A-fig. 103 (whereprovided), to use the mirror.

fig. 102 F0H0096m

fig. 103 F0H0097m

The cigar lighter gets veryhot. Be careful how you han-

dle it and make sure it is not used bychildren: danger of fire or burns.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 71

72

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS SUNROOF(where provided)

The sunroof is fitted with a safety anti-crushing system able to detect the pres-ence of an obstacle during the windowwinding up; should it happen, the systemstops and lowers the window.

The sunroof is fitted with a “skydome”consisting of two glass panels - one fixedand one moving - with sun visors operat-ed manually in two positions (open/closed). The sunroof will only work whenthe ignition key is at MAR. The button,next to the front ceiling light, controlsopening and closing.

To close

From the complete opening position,press button A-fig. 104 and operate it formore than half a second so that the sun-roof front glass panel reaches the “spoil-er” position; operate again the button tostop the sunroof glass in an intermediateposition; press again button A and keep itpressed until complete closing.

fig. 104 F0H0098m

To open

Press and keep button B-fig. 104 pressedso that the sunroof front glass panel reach-es the “spoiler” position; press again but-ton B and operate it for more than half asecond, so that the sunroof glass reachesthe travel end; the sunroof glass can bestopped in an intermediate position by op-erating the button again.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 72

73

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

fig. 105 F0H0099m

EMERGENCY OPERATION

If the switch does not work, the sunroofcan be operated manually as follows:

❒ remove the protective coverbetween the two sun visors

❒ take the provided Allen wrench

❒ insert the provided wrench into theseat A-fig. 105 and turn it:

– clockwise to open the sunroof

– counter-clockwise to close the sun-roof.

In case of cross roof rack, youare suggested to use the sun-roof only in “spoiler” position.

Do not open the sunroof ifthere is snow or ice on it: itcould be damaged.

Always remove the ignitionkey when you get out of the

car to prevent the sunroof being op-erated accidentally and constitutinga danger to the people left in the car.The improper use of the sunroof canbe dangerous. Before and during itsoperation ensure that any passengersare not at risk from the moving roofeither by personal objects gettingcaught in the mechanism or by beinginjured by it directly.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 73

74

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS POWER WINDOWS

For the 2-button version (only front pow-er windows) fig. 107 no type of automa-tism (either opening or closing) is provid-ed. For the 4-button version (front andrear power windows) fig. 106, the driverside is provided with both opening andclosing automatism, whereas the passen-ger side is only provided with opening au-tomatism (where provided also closing au-tomatism). Rear windows are only pro-vided with opening automatism.

IMPORTANT With the ignition key atSTOP or removed, the power windowsremain activated for about 2 minutes andare deactivated immediately the momenta door is opened.

fig. 106 F0H0103m fig. 107 F0H0155m

DRIVER’S DOOR

On the driver’s door panel are set two or(where fitted) five switches for control-ling, with ignition key at MAR:

A front left window opening/closing;

B front right window opening/closing;

C rear left window opening/closing(where fitted);

D rear right window opening/closing(where fitted);

E inhibitor of rear door switches (wherefitted).

Continuous automatic operation (only for front windows, where provided)

Some versions with four power windowsare provided with automatic raising andlowering actuation for the front window(driver side) and automatic lowering onlyactuation for the remaining windows.

A Buttons with continuous automaticoperation both for lowering and rais-ing the window;

B - C - D Buttons with continuous au-tomatic operation only forwindow opening.

Pressing briefly one of the control buttons,the window moves “jerking” and it stopswhen the button is released.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 74

75

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSPASSENGER’S DOOR AND REARDOORS (where fitted)

On each door panel there is the switch forcontrolling the respective window.

Improper use of the powerwindows can be dangerous.

Before and during its operation en-sure that any passengers are not atrisk from the moving glass either bypersonal objects getting caught in themechanism or by being injured by itdirectly. Always remove the ignitionkey when getting out of the car toprevent the power windows being op-erated accidentally and constitutinga danger to the passengers in the car.

WARNING

fig. 108 F0H0156m

REAR MANUALWINDOW CONTROLS(where fitted)

Operate the handle to open or to closethe window fig. 108.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 75

76

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS BOOT

The boot tailgate (when unlocked) can beopened only from the outside through theelectric fig. 109 opening handle set abovethe number plate holder.

If doors are unlocked the boot can beopened at any time.

Through the set-up menu of the clusterdisplay (see “Reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay” in the present chapter) it is pos-sible to activate the “Key” option: in thisway the boot is not unlocked togetherwith the doors; to open it press buttonR on the remote control fig. 110.

The tailgate opening is indicated by dou-ble flashing of direction indicators.

TAILGATE CLOSING

First lower the tailgate using the appro-priate handles fig. 111 and then push thetailgate until it clicks into place.

IMPORTANT If option “Key” is on, be-fore closing the boot check whether youhave with you the ignition key since theboot will be locked automatically.

fig. 109 F0H0742m

fig. 110 F0H0702m

The addition of objects(speakers, spoilers, etc.) onthe rear shelf or boot lid, ex-cept those envisaged by the

manufacturer, may prevent the gasfilled struts at the sides of the bootfrom working properly.

When using the boot, makesure the loads do not exceed

the permitted weight (see “Technicalspecifications” chapter). Also makesure the items in the boot arearranged properly to prevent thembeing thrown forwards and injuringpassengers should you brake sharply.

WARNING

Never travel with objects onthe rear shelf to prevent

them being thrown forwards and in-juring passengers in case of accidentor sharp braking.

WARNING

fig. 111 F0H0105m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 76

77

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSEMERGENCY OPENING OFTAILGATE

To succeed in opening the tailgate fromthe inside, should the car battery be flat,or because of a defect of the electric lockof the tailgate, proceed as follows (referto “Extending the boot” in this section):

❒ remove the rear head restraints;

❒ tilt seat backrests to “table” configu-ration;

❒ tilt cushion / backrest completely.

❒ operate lever B-fig. 112, to obtaintailgate mechanical release, operatingfrom the inside of the boot.

REMOVING THE REAR PARCELSHELF

To remove the rear parcel shelf in orderto extend the boot, proceed as follows:

❒ Front parcel shelf: release and turnthe parcel shelf from its seat andrelease the two pins from the sideseats fig. 113.

❒ Rear parcel shelf: release the twopins from the side seats

EXTENDING THE BOOT WITH SLIDING SEAT

Before extending the boot, release theseat belt buckle (with black button, if fas-tened) and accompany the webbing in thereel to prevent it from twisting; insert thetongues, overlapping them, in the retain-ing system A-fig. 114 inside the reel com-partment.

Moving the seat backwards or forwards

The rear seat is of the double-seat type. Itis possible to move the rear seat back-wards or forwards from the boot usinghandles B or C-fig. 115; pull the handleand at the same time move the seats for-wards. This makes it possible to extendthe boot capacity.

fig. 112 F0H0338m fig. 113 F0H0108m

fig. 114 F0H0132m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 77

78

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS To extend the boot totally

Proceed as follows:

❒ remove the rear parcel and previ-ously shown;

❒ make sure the headrests are com-pletely lowered;

❒ use levers D and E-fig. 116 to foldthe rear seat backs on the cushions;

❒ make sure the seats are completely inbackward position by means of han-dles B or C-fig. 115;

❒ use tapes F and G-fig. 116 to tilt theseats completely.

IMPORTANT Tilting is only possible withrear seats positioned completely back-wards.

The tilted seats are fastened in this posi-tion by the action of the side struts.

Partial extension

Operating the required part (right or left)of the seat in the same way it is possibleto obtain partial extension of the boot fig. 119.

IMPORTANT For rear seat complete tilt-ing it could be necessary to move the frontseats forward.

fig. 115 F0H0048m fig. 116 F0H0109m

Never pull tapes B or C-fig. 115 with seats in load po-

sition as they will slide vertically thushindering seat repositioning.

WARNING

fig. 117 F0H0110mTo return the cushions on the floor

Use tapes B-fig. 117 to return the cush-ions on the floor.

If the central seat belt is fas-tened to the seat, release it

before tilting the seat.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 78

79

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

With table folded seats, inthe event of a crash it can be

dangerous to carry heavy objects onthe rear seat back.

WARNING

The position of the rear seatbacks folded on the respec-

tive cushions shall not be considereda loading position and therefore can-not bear heavy weights.

WARNING

fig. 118 F0H0111m fig. 119 F0H0112m

EXTENDING THE BOOT WITH FIXED SEAT

Proceed as follows:

❒ fasten the seat buckles to the tabs onthe seat back fig. 120 (as shown byarrows);

❒ check that the webbing C-fig. 121 ofeach of the two side seat belts isinserted into the respective belt guid-ing catch D-fig. 121;

❒ raise the cushion A-fig. 121 as shownin the figure

fig. 120 F0H0120m

fig. 121 F0H0347m

❒ release the seat back moving thelevers B-fig. 121 as shown by thearrow. Tilt it to make a single loadingsurface with the boot floor;

❒ if vertical space must be increased,remove Cargo box (where provided)positioned under load plane mat.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 79

80

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS BONNET

TO OPEN THE BONNET

Proceed as follows:

❒ pull lever A-fig. 122 in the directionof the arrow;

❒ move the lever B-fig. 123 to the rightas shown by the arrow;

❒ lift the bonnet and at the same timerelease the rod C-fig. 124 from theclip D, then insert the rod end in itshousing E on the bonnet.

IMPORTANT Before opening the bonnet,check that windscreen wiper arms are notlifted from the windscreen.

For safety reasons the bon-net shall always be perfectly

closed when travelling. Always checkfor proper bonnet locking. If the bon-net is left inadvertently open, stop thecar immediately and close the bon-net.

WARNING

fig. 122 F0H0113m

fig. 123 F0H0743mfig. 121 F0H0115m

TO CLOSE THE BONNET

Proceed as follows:

❒ hold the bonnet up with one hand andwith the other remove rod C-fig. 124from recess D and replace it in itslocking device E;

❒ lower the bonnet at approx. 20 cen-timetres from the engine compart-ment and then let it drop, ensuringthat it is fully closed and not just heldin position by the safety catch. If thebonnet does not close properly, donot push it down but open it again andrepeat the above procedure.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 80

81

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

If the supporting rod is notpositioned correctly the bon-

net may fall violently.

WARNING

Carry out operations whenthe vehicle is stationary.

WARNING

IMPORTANT Always check that the bon-net is closed properly to avoid its openingwhile the car is travelling.

ROOF RACKS (where fitted)

IMPORTANT You are recommended touse the roof racks fig. 125 available fromLineaccesori Fiat. Always attain to the in-stallation instructions provided with thekit and have the roof racks installed byskilled personnel.

IMPORTANT Never exceed the max.permissible loads (see section “Technicalspecifications”).

After few kilometers, check that fasteningscrews are firmly tightened.

fig. 125 F0H0248m

Never activate the sunroofwith roof racks mounted.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 81

82

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS HEADLIGHTS

ADJUSTING THE HEADLIGHTBEAM

Proper adjustment of the headlight beamsis of vital importance for your safety andcomfort and also for the other road users.To ensure you and other drivers have thebest visibility conditions when travellingwith the headlights on, the headlights mustbe set properly. Contact Fiat Dealershipto have the headlights properly adjusted.

Headlight aiming device

The device can be operated with the ig-nition key at MAR and dipped beam head-lights on. When the car is loaded, it slopesbackwards. This means that the headlightbeam rises. In this case, it is necessary toreturn it to the correct position.

To adjust the headlight slant fig. 126

To adjust the headlight slant operate but-tons and Ò located on the dashboard.

The display provides the visual indicationof the positions during the adjustment op-eration.

fig. 126 F0H0736m

Position 0 - one or two people occupy-ing the front seats.

Position 1 - five people.

Position 2 - five people + load in the boot.

Position 3 - driver + maximum permissi-ble load stowed in the boot.

IMPORTANT Check beam aiming everytime the load carried changes.

HEADLIGHT ADJUSTMENTABROAD

The dipped-beam headlights are adjustedfor circulation in the country in which thevehicle is marketed.

In countries with opposite circulation, toavoid glaring oncoming vehicles, it is nec-essary to cover the areas of the headlightas shown below: this is done using non-transparent sticker tape.

Fig. 127-128 refer to passing from right-hand drive to left-hand drive.

fig. 127 F0H0118m

fig. 128 F0H0119m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 82

83

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSABS SYSTEM

If this is the first car with ABS you drive,get familiar with it by some preliminary“driving tests” on poor grip roadbeds, ob-viously under safety conditions and incompliance with the traffic regulations ofthe Country you are driving in. Read care-fully the following instructions.

The car is fitted with an ABS braking sys-tem, which prevents the wheels from lock-ing when braking, makes the most of roadgrip and gives the best control whenemergency braking under difficult roadconditions.

System is completed by EBD (ElectronicBraking Force Distribution), which dis-tributes the braking action between frontand rear wheels.

IMPORTANT To have the maximum ef-ficiency of the braking system, it is neces-sary a setting period of about 500 km: dur-ing this period it is better to avoid sharp,repeated and prolonged brakes.

ABS INTERVENTION

The driver can tell the ABS system hascome into action because the brake ped-al pulsates slightly and the system getsnoisier: it means that the car speed shouldbe altered to fit the type of road surface.

If the ABS system cuts in, it is a sign thatthe grip between tyre and the road sur-face has reached the limit: you must slowdown to match the speed to the road gripavailable.

FAILURE WARNINGS

ABS failure

If there is a fault, the instrument panelwarning light > will come on togetherwith the message (where provided) on thereconfigurable multifunction display (seethe “Warning lights” chapter).

In this case the braking system is still effi-cient, though without the aid of the ABSsystem. Drive carefully to the closest FiatDealership to have the system checked.

EBD failure

It is signalled by lighting up of instrumentpanel warning lights > and x togetherwith the message (where provided) on thereconfigurable multifunction display (seethe “Warning lights” chapter).

In this case with sharp braking the rearwheels might lock too early, with the pos-sibility of skidding. Drive extremely care-fully to the nearest Fiat Dealership to havethe system checked.

If the ABS system cuts in, itis a sign that the grip be-

tween tyre and the road surface hasreached the limit: you must slowdown to match the speed to the roadgrip available.

WARNING

The ABS exploits the tyre-road grip at the best, but it

cannot improve it; you should there-fore take every care when driving onslippery surfaces without taking un-necessary risks.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 83

84

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSWhen the ABS cuts in, andyou feel the brake pedal pul-

sating, do not remove your foot, butkeep it pressed; in doing so you willstop in the shortest amount of spacepossible under the current road con-ditions.

WARNING

If brake fluid low warninglight x lights up on the in-

strument panel (together, where pro-vided, with the message on the re-configurable multifunction display),stop immediately the car and contactthe closest Fiat Dealership. Fluid leaksfrom the hydraulic system, in fact, cancompromise the braking system, bothtraditional systems and systems withABS.

WARNING

EOBD SYSTEM

The EOBD system (European On BoardDiagnosis) allows continuos diagnosis ofthe components of the car correlated withemissions.

It also alerts the driver, by turning on thewarning light U on the instrument panel(together, where provided, with the mes-sage on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay - see the “Warning lights” chapter)when these components are no longer inpeak conditions.

The objective is:

❒ to keep system efficiency under con-trol;

❒ to warn when a fault causes emissionlevels to increase;

❒ to warn of the need to replace dete-riorated components.

The system also has a diagnostic connec-tor that can be interfaced with appropri-ate tools, which makes it possible to readthe error codes stored in the control unit,together with a series of specific parame-ters for engine operation and diagnosis.This check can also be carried out by thetraffic police.

IMPORTANT After eliminating the in-convenience, to check the system com-pletely, Fiat Dealerships are obliged to runa bench test and, if necessary, road testswhich may also call for a long journey.

If turning the ignition key toMAR, the warning light Udoes not turn on or if, whiletravelling, it turns on glowing

steadily or flashing, (on some versionstogether with the message on the re-configurable multifunction display),contact Fiat Dealership as soon as pos-sible. The operation of warning lightU can be checked by the traffic po-lice. Attain to the rules enforced in thecountry where the car is being used.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 84

85

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSSOUND SYSTEM(where fitted)

For the operation of the radio with CD orCD MP3, read the instructions for use giv-en in the attached Supplement.

PRESET SYSTEM (where fitted)

The system consists of:

❒ radio power cables

❒ front and rear loudspeaker power ca-bles

❒ aerial power cable

❒ 2 tweeters on front cross members(power 30W max each);

❒ 2 mid-woofers on front doors (diam-eter 165 mm, power 30W max each);

❒ 2 full-range on rear doors (diameter165 mm, power 30W max each).

Sound system installation

The sound system shall be installed inplace of the central lower fig. 129 com-partment: removing it you can see thepower cables. To remove the glove com-partment, press the points shown in thefigure next to the retainers.

You are advised to have thesound system and the radiointerference suppressor in-stalled at a Fiat Dealership.

fig. 129 F0H0120m

CELLULAR TELEPHONEPROVISION (where fitted)

The telephone provision is matched to theradio with CD or CD MP3 and consistsof:

❒ dual-purpose aerial (sound system +cellular phone 900/1800 MHz), on thecar roof;

❒ dual-purpose aerial connecting cableand wiring with 10-way connector.

The hands-free kit must bepurchased by the Customersince it must be compatiblewith the owned cellular

phone. You are suggested to have themicrophone installed next to the frontceiling light.

The maximum power ap-plicable on the aerial is 20W.

WARNING

Contact Fiat Dealership forthe installation and connec-

tion of the cellular phone on the ve-hicle, to prevent any faults whichmight compromise the car safety.

WARNING

The connector is located between the thesteering column and the central console.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 85

86

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS ACCESSORIESPURCHASEDBY THE OWNER

If, after buying the car, you decide to in-stall electrical accessories that require apermanent electric supply (alarm, satelliteantitheft system, etc.) or accessories thatin any case burden the electric supply,contact Fiat Dealership, whose qualifiedpersonnel, besides suggesting the mostsuitable devices belonging to LineaccessoriFiat, will also evaluate the overall electricabsorption, checking whether the vehicleelectric system is able to withstand theload required, or whether it needs to beintegrated with a more powerful battery.

INSTALLATION OF ELECTRIC/ELECTRONIC DEVICES

Electric/electronic devices installed afterbuying the car or in aftermarket shall bearthe and marking:

Fiat Auto S.p.A. authorizes the installationof transceivers provided that installationis carried out at a specialized shop, work-manlike performed and in compliance withmanufacturer's specifications.

IMPORTANT Installation of devices re-sulting in modifications of car characteris-tics may cause driving license seizing bytraffic agents and also the lapse of the war-ranty as concerns defects due to theabovementioned modification or traceableback to it directly or indirectly.

Fiat Auto S.p.A. declines all responsibilityfor damages caused by the installation ofnon-genuine accessories or not recom-mended by Fiat Auto S.p.A. and installednot in compliance with the specified re-quirements.

RADIO TRANSMITTERS ANDCELLULAR TELEPHONES

Radio transceiver equipment (e.g.: e-tacsmobile phones, HAM radio systems andthe like) shall not be used inside the ve-hicle unless a separate aerial is mountedon the roof.

IMPORTANT The use of similar devicesinside the passenger compartment (with-out separated aerial) produces radio-fre-quency electromagnetic fields which, am-plified by the resonance effects inside thepassenger compartment, may cause elec-trical systems equipping the vehicle to mal-function. This could compromise safety inaddition to constituting a potential hazardfor the passengers.

In addition, transmission and reception ofthese devices may be affected by theshielding effect of the vehicle body.

As concerns EC-approved mobile phones(GSM, GPRS, UMTS), strictly comply withthe instructions for use provided by themobile phone’s manufacturer.

Be careful when mountingadditional spoilers, alloy rims

and non original wheel caps: theymay reduce the brake ventilation andefficiency during sharp and repeat-ed braking or sloping downhill. Alsomake sure that nothing (over-carpet-ing, etc.) interferes with the pedalstroke.

WARNING

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 86

87

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS“DUALDRIVE” ELECTRICPOWER STEERINGSYSTEM

The car is fitted with an electrically con-trolled power steering called “Dualdrive”.It only works when the ignition key is atMAR and the engine is running and it canbe customised by the driver according tothe driving conditions.

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION(CITY function)

To turn this function on/off, press theCITY fig. 130 button located in the mid-dle of the instrument panel.

On some versions the activation of thisfunction is signalled by the lighting up ofthe CITY warning light on the instrumentpanel, on others by the lighting up ofCITY on the reconfigurable multifunctiondisplay.

With the CITY function, the steeringwheel will be lighter and require less ef-fort for parking. This operating strategyis suitable for driving in cities.

fig. 130 F0H0716m

It is absolutely forbidden tocarry out whatever after-

market operation involving steeringsystem or steering column modifica-tions (e.g.: installation of anti-theftdevice) that could badly affect per-formance and safety, cause the lapseof warranty and result in car non-compliance with the regulations inforce.

WARNING

In the event of electric power steering fail-ure, the car can be driven with mechani-cal steering to the closest Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT The steering may becomeslightly stiff following parking manoeuvresincluding a great deal of steering. This isnormal and caused by the system to pre-vent motor overheating. No servicing isrequired. The electrical power steeringsystem will return to normal operationthe next time the car is used.

Always switch the engine off,remove the key from the

starting device and actuate the steer-ing lock before carrying out any main-tenance operation, especially whenthe wheels are raised from theground. In case this is not possible(e.g. when the key must be in MARposition or the engine running), re-move the electric power steeringmain fuse before carrying out anymaintenance operation.

WARNING

FAILURE WARNINGS

Any electric power steering failure is in-dicated by cluster warning light g com-ing on (together, where provided, with themessage on the reconfigurable multifunc-tion display - see the “Warning lights”chapter).

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 87

88

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS PARKING SENSORS(where provided)

The parking sensors are located on therear bumper fig. 131 and their function isto inform the driver, through an inter-mittent buzzer, about the presence of ob-stacles in the rear part of the car.

ACTIVATION

The sensors are automatically activatedwhen the reverse gear is engaged.

As the distance from the obstacle behindthe car decreases, the acoustic alarm be-comes more frequent.

BUZZER WARNINGS

Engaging reverse gear, if an obstacle is lo-cated in the area behind the car, an inter-mittent sound signal activates.

The acoustic signal:

❒ becomes louder as the reduction ofdistance between the car and the ob-stacle decreases;

❒ becomes continuous when the dis-tance between the car and the obsta-cle is less that 30 cm and stops if thedistance raises;

❒ is constant if the distance is unvaried.If this situation takes place for side sen-sors, the signal is stopped after about3 seconds to prevent sound indica-tions when performing manoeuvresnear walls.

fig. 131 F0H0744m

Direction distances

The central detecting range varies ac-cording to car engine type/set-up version:detection range is 140 cm. For small sizeobstacles (or in case of parking deterrentblocks that are round shaped) it is 70 cm.Side detecting range is 60 cm.

If several obstacles are detected, the con-trol unit indicates the nearest one.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 88

89

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSFAILURE WARNINGS

See the “Warning lights and messages”chapter.

OPERATION WITH TRAILER

The system is preset for deactivating au-tomatically when the trailer electric ca-ble plug is fitted into the car tow hooksocket.

Sensors are reactivated when removingthe trailer cable plug.

For proper operation, theparking sensors set on thebumpers shall be clean frommud, dirt, snow or ice. When

cleaning the sensors, take the utmostcare to prevent their damaging; do notuse therefore dry or rough clothes. Sen-sors shall be washed with clean waterand car detergent, if required. In wash-ing stations, clean sensors quickly keep-ing the vapour jet/high pressure wash-ing nozzles at 10 cm at least from thesensors.

Parking manoeuvres howev-er are always under the dri-

ver’s responsibility that shall alwayscheck the absence of people, animalsor objects in the manoeuvre space.This system is just a help for the dri-ver but he shall never reduce impor-tant during dangerous manoeuvreseven if performed at low speed.

WARNING

GENERAL WARNINGS

❒ When parking, take the utmost careto obstacles set above or under thesensors.

❒ Objects set close to car rear part, un-der certain circumstances are not de-tected and could therefore cause dam-ages to the car.

❒ Indications sent by the sensor can bealtered by dirt, snow or ice deposit-ed on the sensors or by ultrasoundsystems (e.g.: truck pneumatic brakesor pneumatic hammers) set nearby thecar.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 89

90

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

The car must only be filledwith diesel fuel for motor ve-hicles, in compliance with Eu-ropean Standard EN590. The

use of other products or mixtures mayirreparably damage the engine with in-validation of the warranty due to thedamage caused. In the event of acci-dentally filling with another type of fu-el, do not start the engine and emptythe tank. If the engine has been runeven for only a very short time, in ad-dition to the tank, it is also necessaryto drain out the whole fuel circuit.

AT THE FILLINGSTATION

PETROL ENGINES

Use only unleaded petrol.

To prevent errors, the diameter of the fu-el tank filler is too small to introduce a leadpetrol pump filler. Use petrol with a rat-ed octane number (R.O.N.) not lowerthan 95.

IMPORTANT An inefficient catalyst leadsto harmful exhaust emissions, thus con-tributing to air pollution.

IMPORTANT Never use leaded petrol,even in small amount or in an emergency,as this would damage the catalyst beyondrepair.

MULTIJET ENGINES

Operation at low temperatures

If the outside temperature is very low, thediesel thickens due to the formation ofparaffin and could cause the malfunction-ing of the fuel system.

In order to avoid these problems, differ-ent types of diesel are distributed ac-cording to the season: summer type, win-ter type and arctic type (cold, mountainareas). If refuelling with diesel fuel not suit-able for the current temperature, mixdiesel fuel with TUTELA DIESEL ART ad-ditive in the proportions stated on the can,putting first the antifreeze in the tank andthen the diesel fuel.

If driving or parking the vehicle for a longperiod in cold areas/mountains, refuel withthe diesel fuel available at local filling sta-tions.

In this situation you are also recom-mended to have in the tank an amount offuel 50% higher than usable capacity.

REFUELLING

To guarantee full tank filling, carry out tworefuelling operations after the first click ofthe fuel delivery gun. Avoid further top-ping up operations that could cause dam-ages to the fuel system.

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 90

91

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LS

FUEL FILLER CAP

Fuel lid opening depends on door lock/un-lock: if the doors are locked (led on but-ton ON), to refill the tank it is necessaryto press the button D-fig. 133 (led on thebutton OFF).

To fuel, open flap A-fig. 132 and unscrewcap C.

Cap C is fitted with an anti-loss device Bwhich fastens it inside the filler so it can-not be mislaid

The sealing of the tank may cause lightpressurising in the tank. A little breathingoff, while slackening the cap, is absolutelynormal.

fig. 132 F0H0125m fig. 133 F0H0717m

Do not put naked flames orlighted cigarettes near the

fuel filler hole as there is danger offire. Do not bend too close to the holeeither so as not to breathe in harmfulvapours.

WARNING EMERGENCY OPENING OF THE FLAP

In an emergency it is possible to open theflap by pulling the cord A-fig. 134.

To reach the cord, remove the protectivecover.

fig. 134 F0H0765m

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 91

PROTECTINGTHE ENVIRONMENT

The devices for curtailing petrol engineemissions are the following:

❒ three-way catalytic converter;

❒ Lambda sensor;

❒ fuel evaporation system.

In addition, do not let the engine run, evenfor a test, with one or more spark plugsdisconnected.

The devices for curtailing diesel fuel en-gine emissions are the following:

❒ oxidising catalytic converter;

❒ exhaust gas recirculation system(E.G.R.).

❒ diesel particulate filter (DPF)

DIESEL PARTICULATE FILTER (DPF) (for 1.3 Multijetversions 90 HP)

The Diesel Particulate Filter is a mechan-ical filter, integral with the exhaust system,that physically traps particulates presentin the exhaust gases of Diesel engines.

The diesel particular filter has been adopt-ed to eliminate almost totally particulatesin compliance with current / future lawregulations.

During normal use of the vehicle, the en-gine control unit records a set of data (e.g.:travel time, type of route, temperatures,etc.) and it will then calculate how muchparticulates has been trapped by the filter.

Since this filter physically traps particulates,it shall be cleaned (reclaimed) at regularintervals by burning carbon particles.

Reclaiming procedure is controlled auto-matically by the engine control unit ac-cording to the filter conditions and theconditions of use of the vehicle.

During normal service thecatalyst reaches high tem-

peratures. Do not therefore park thecar over inflammable materials (grass,dry leaves, pine needles, etc.): firehazard.

WARNING

During reclaiming the following phenom-ena could take place: idling slight increase,fan activation, slight smoke increase, highexhaust temperatures. These situationsshall not be considered as faults and theydo not affect vehicle performance and en-vironment.

If the dedicated message is displayed, re-fer to paragraph “Warning lights and mes-sages”.

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSIN

DEX

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSCA

RMA

INTE

NANC

EIN

AN

EMER

GENC

Y

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

92

036-092 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 16:12 Pagina 92

93

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

SEAT BELTS............................................................................ 94PRETENSIONERS ................................................................. 97CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY ..................................... 99PRESETTING FOR MOUNTING THE “TYPE ISOFIX” CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM .............. 103FRONT AND SIDE AIR BAGS.......................................... 106SIDE AIR BAGS (SIDE BAG - FRONT WINDOW BAG).................................................. 108

SSSAAFFEETTYY DDEEVVIICCEESS

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 93

94

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

SEAT BELTS

USING THE FRONT AND REAR SIDE SEAT BELTS

The belt should be worn keeping the cheststraight and rested against the seat back.

To fasten the belt, take hold the tongueA-fig. 1 and insert it into the buckle B,until hearing the locking click.

At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for ashort stretch, then pull it out again with-out jerking.

To unfasten the seat belts, press buttonC-fig. 1. Guide the seat belt with yourhand while it is rewinding, to prevent itfrom twisting.

Through the reel, the belt automaticallyadapts to the body of the passenger wear-ing it, allowing freedom of movement.

When the car is parked on a steep slopethe reel mechanism may block; this is nor-mal. The reel mechanism prevents thewebbing coming out when it is jerked orif the car brakes sharply, in a collision orwhen cornering at high speed.

The rear seat is fitted with inertial seatbelts with three anchor points and reel.

Rear seat belts shall be worn as shown indiagram D-fig. 2 (5-seat versions) or asshown in diagram E-fig. 3 (4-seat ver-sions).

fig. 1 F0H0126m fig. 2 F0H0309m

fig. 3 F0H0348m

Do not press button C-fig. 1during travelling.

WARNING S.B.R. system

The car is fitted with the S.B.R. system(Seat Belt Reminder), consisting of abuzzer which, together with the flashingof warning light < on the instrument pan-el, warns the driver to fasten the seatbelts.

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 94

95

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

The buzzer can be deactivated (until thethe next engine stop) as follows:

❒ fasten the driver’s seat belt.

❒ turn the ignition key to MAR

❒ wait for over 20 seconds and then re-lease at least one of the seat belts.

For permanent deactivation, contact FiatDealership.

On versions fitted with reconfigurablemultifunction display (Comfort) it is pos-sible to reset the S.B.R. system onlythrough the set-up menu (see “Warninglights and messages” section at paragraph“Unfastened seat belts”).

For the other versions system can be re-set only by Fiat Dealership.

FRONT SEAT BELT HEIGHTADJUSTMENT (where provided)

Always adjust the height of the seat beltto fit the person wearing it. This precau-tion could greatly reduce the risk of injuryin case of collision.

Correct adjustment is obtained when thebelt passes half way between the end ofthe shoulder and the neck.

To adjust the seat belt, raise or lowerknob A-fig. 4 of the locking mechanism,moving at the same time the loop B to thebest of the available positions.

USING THE CENTRAL SEATBELT (where provided)

The seat belt has two webbings and a dou-ble buckle.

To use the seat belt, take tongues H andP-fig. 5 from their seats in the reel com-partment and pull the seat belt sliding thewebbing carefully without twisting or jerk-ing it, then fasten the tongue G-fig. 6 inbuckle L with button M.

Remember that in the eventof a violent collision, back

seat passengers not wearing seat beltsalso represent a serious danger forthe front seat passengers.

WARNING

Make the height adjustmentwhen the car is stationary.

WARNING

After adjustment, alwayscheck that the slider is an-

chored in one of the positions pro-vided. To do this, with the button re-leased, exert a further pressure to al-low the anchor device to catch if re-lease did not take place at one of thepreset positions.

WARNING

fig. 4 F0H0128m

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 95

96

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

fig. 5 F0H0311m

To wear the seat belt: slide the webbingand insert the tongue I-fig. 6 into buckleN.

To fasten the seat belt: press button Oand accompany the webbing to avoidtwisting it.

Extending the luggage compartment: re-lease the buckle by pressing button M-fig. 6 and accompany the webbing toavoid twisting it; insert tongue I in seat Pand tongue G in seat H inside the reelcompartment.

IMPORTANT After putting the seats backto their travelling position, restore theseat belt position to make them ready foruse.

fig. 6 F0H0310m

Remember that in the eventof a violent collision, back

seat passengers not wearing seat beltsalso represent a serious danger forthe front seat passengers.

WARNING

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 96

97

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

PRETENSIONERS

To increase the efficiency of the seat belts,the vehicle is fitted with pretensioners.These devices, in the event of a violentcrash, rewind the seat belts a few cen-timetres. In this way they ensure that theseat belt adheres perfectly to the wearerbefore the restraining action begins.

The seat belt locks to indicate that the de-vice has intervened; the seat belt cannotbe drawn back up even when guiding itmanually.

IMPORTANT To obtain the highest de-gree of protection from the action of thepretensioning device, wear the seat beltkeeping it firmly close to the chest andpelvis.

A small amount of smoke may be pro-duced. This smoke is in no way toxic andpresents no fire hazard.

The pretensioner does not require anymaintenance or greasing.

Anything that modifies its original condi-tions invalidates its efficiency.

If due to unusual natural events (floods,sea storm, etc.) the device has been af-fected by water and mud, it must neces-sarily be replaced.

LOAD LIMITERS

To increase passenger’s safety, the frontseat belt reels contain a load limiter whichallows controlled sag in such a way as todose the force acting on the chest andshoulders during the belt restraining ac-tion in case of front crash.

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR USING THE SEAT BELTS

The driver must comply with (and havethe vehicle occupants follow) all the locallegal regulations concerning the use of seatbelts. Always fasten the seat belts beforestarting.

Seat belts are also to be worn by expec-tant mothers: the risk of injury in the caseof accident is greatly reduced for them andthe unborn child if they are wearing a seatbelt.

The pretensioner can onlybe used once. After a colli-

sion that has triggered it, have it re-placed at a Fiat Dealership. Preten-sioner validity is written on the plateset on the upper oddment compart-ment on passenger side. Pretension-ers should be replaced at Fiat Deal-ership as this date approaches.

WARNING

Operations which lead toknocks, vibrations or localisedheating (over 100°C for amaximum of 6 hours) in the

area around the pretensioners maycause damage or trigger them. Thesedevices are not affected by vibrationscaused by irregularities of the road sur-face or low obstacles such as kerbs, etc.Contact a Fiat Dealership for any as-sistance.

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 97

98

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

fig. 7 F0H0133mfig. 8 F0H0134m fig. 9 F0H0135m

The belt should not be twist-ed. The upper part should

pass over the shoulder and cross thechest diagonally. The lower partshould adhere to the pelvis and notthe abdomen of the passenger. Donot use any objects (pegs, stoppers,etc.) to keep the belts away from thebody.

WARNING

For maximum safety, keepthe back of your seat up-

right, lean back into it and make surethe seat belt fits closely across yourchest and hips. Make sure that theseat belts of the front and rear pas-sengers are fastened at all times! Youincrease the risk of serious injury ordeath in a collision if you travel withthe belts unfastened.

WARNING

Under no circumstancesshould the components of

the seat belts and pretensioners betampered with or removed. Any op-eration should be carried out by qual-ified and authorised personnel. Al-ways contact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

If the belt has been subject-ed to heavy stress, for ex-

ample after an accident, it should bechanged completely together withthe anchors, anchor fastening screwsand the pretensioners. In fact, even ifthe belt has no visible defects, it couldhave lost its resilience.

WARNING

Never travel with a child sit-ting on the passenger’s lap

with a single belt to protect themboth. Do not fasten other objects tothe body.

WARNING

Of course they must position the lowerpart of the belt very low down so that itpasses under the abdomen (fig. 7).

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 98

99

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTS ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT CONDITIONS

❒ Always use the belt with the tape tautand never twisted; make sure that it isfree to run without impediments.

❒ After a serious accident, replace thebelt being worn at that time, even ifit does not appear damaged. Alwaysreplace the seat belts if pretensionershave been activated.

❒ To clean the belts, wash by hand withneutral soap, rinse and leave to dry inthe shade. Never use strong deter-gents, bleach or dyes or other chem-ical substance that might weaken thefibres.

❒ Prevent the reels from getting wet:their correct operation is only guar-anteed if water does not get inside.

❒ Replace the seat belt when showingsignificant wear or cut signs.

CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY

For optimal protection in the event of acrash, all passengers must be seated andwearing adequate restraint systems.

This is even more important for children.

According to 2003/20/EC Directive, thisprescription is compulsory for all Euro-pean Community countries.

Compared with adults, their head is pro-portionally larger and heavier than the restof the body, while the muscles and bonestructure are not completely developed.Therefore, correct restraint systems arenecessary, other than adult seat belts. Theresults of research on the best child re-straint systems are contained in the Eu-ropean Standard ECE-R44. This Standardenforces the use of restraint systems clas-sified in five groups:

Group 0 0-10 kg in weight

Group 0+ 0-13 kg in weight




As it may be noted, the groups overlappartly and in fact, in commerce it is pos-sible to find devices that cover more thanone weight group.

All restraint devices must bear the certi-fication data, together with the controlbrand, on a solidly fixed label which mustabsolutely never be removed.

Over 1.50 m in height, from the point ofview of restraint systems, children areconsidered as adults and wear the seatbelts normally.

Lineaccessori Fiat offers seats for eachweight group, which are the recommend-ed choice, as they have been designed andexperimented specifically for Fiat cars.

With passenger’s air bag ac-tive, never place child’s seats

with the cradle facing backwardssince the air bag activation couldcause to the child serious injuries,even mortal, regardless of the seri-ousness of the crash that triggered it.You are advised to carry children al-ways with proper restraint systems onthe rear seats, as this is the most pro-tected position in the case of a crash.

WARNING

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 99

100

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

SIGNIFICANT DANGER If itis necessary to carry a childon the passenger side frontseat with a child seat facingthe back of the car, the pas-senger airbags (front airbag,

where provided, and side airbag onseat), must be disabled by means ofthe menu of the reconfigurable mul-tifunctional display, directly verifyingthe actual disablement by means ofthe light “ located on the dashboard(see section “Manual disablement offront and side passenger air bag”). The passenger seat must be adjustedin the rearmost position, to avoid any contact of the child seat with thedashboard.

WARNING

GROUP 0 and 0+ fig. 10

Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facingbackwards on a cradle seat, which, sup-porting the head, does not induce stresson the neck in the event of sharp decel-eration.

The cradle is restrained by the car seatbelts and in turn it must restrain the childwith its own belts.

fig. 10 F0H0136m

The figure is only an exam-ple for mounting. Attain to

the instructions for fastening whichmust be enclosed with the specificchild restraining system you are using.

WARNINGSeats exist which are suit-able for covering weight

groups 0 and 1 with a rear connectionto the vehicle belts and their ownbelts to restrain the child. Due to theirsize, they can be dangerous if in-stalled incorrectly fastened to the carbelts with a cushion. Carefully followthe instructions for installation pro-vided with the seat.

WARNING

fig. 11 F0H0137m

GROUP 1 fig. 11

Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, chil-dren may be carried facing forwards, withseat fitted with front cushion, throughwhich the car seat belt restrains both childand seat.

Seats exist which are suit-able for covering weight


WARNING

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 100

101

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

fig. 12 F0H0138m

GROUP 2 fig. 12

Starting from 15 kg to 25 kg in weight, chil-dren may be restrained directly by the carbelts. The only function of the seat is toposition the child correctly in relation tothe belts, so that the diagonal part adheresto the chest and not to the neck and thatthe horizontal part clings to the child’spelvis and not the abdomen.

Seats exist which are suit-able for covering weight


WARNING

fig. 13 F0H0139m

The figure is only an exam-ple for mounting. Attain to

the instructions for fastening whichmust be enclosed with the specificchild restraining system you are using.

WARNING

Group 3 fig. 13

For children from 22 kg to 36 kg the sizeof the child’s chest no longer requires asupport to space the child’s back from theseat back.

The figure shows proper child seat posi-tioning on the rear seat.

Children taller than 1.50 m can wear seatbelts like adults.

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 101

102

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE

This vehicle complies with the new European Directive 2000/3/CE regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats ac-cording to the following table:

SEAT

Group Range of weight Front passenger Rear passenger Central passengerside rear

Group 0, 0+ until 13 kg U U *

Group 1 9-18 kg U U *



Key:U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups”.* Never mount child restraint systems on the rear central seat.

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 102

103

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

Below is a summary of the rules of safety to be followed for carrying children:

❒ The recommended position for in-stalling children’s seat is on the rearseat, as it is the most protected in thecase of a crash.

❒ If the passenger’s air bag is deactivat-ed (where required) always check theamber yellow warning light “ on thecluster to make sure that it has actu-ally been deactivated.

❒ Attain to the instructions for fasteningthe specific child restraint systemwhich you are using. These instruc-tions must be provided by the manu-facturer. Keep the child restraint sys-tem installation instructions with thecar documents and this Handbook.Never use a child restraint systemwithout installation instructions.

❒ Always check the seat belt is well fas-tened by pulling the webbing.

❒ Only one child is to be strapped toeach retaining system.

❒ Always check the seat belts do not fitaround the child’s throat.

❒ While travelling, do not let the childsit incorrectly or release the belts.

❒ Passengers should never carry childrenon their laps. No-one, however strongthey are, can hold a child in the eventof a crash.

❒ In case of an accident, replace the seatwith a new one.

With passenger’s air bag ac-tive, never place child’s seats

with the cradle facing backwardssince the air bag activation couldcause to the child serious injuries,even mortal, regardless of the seri-ousness of the crash that triggered it.You are advised to carry children al-ways with proper restraint systems onthe rear seats, as this is the most pro-tected position in the case of a crash.

WARNING

ISOFIX CHILDRESTRAINTASSEMBLY SETUP

Provision has been made on the car tomount a Universal Isofix child restraintsystem, a new European standardised sys-tem for carrying children safely.

Isofix systems can be mounted simultane-ously with a traditional restraint system.

An example of child seat is shown in fig. 14.

The Universal Isofix child seat coversweight group: 1.

Specific Isofix child seats cover the otherweight groups. These seats must be de-signed, tested and type-approved specifi-cally for this car (refer to the list of carsattached to the child seat).

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 103

104

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

fig. 15 F0H0140m

Fit the child seat when thecar is stationary. The child

seat is correctly anchored to thebrackets when you hear the click. Fol-low the instructions for assembly, dis-assembly and positioning that themanufacturer must supply with thechild seat.

WARNING

fig. 14 F0H0019m

As the attachment system is different, thechild seat must be secured using the low-er metal rings A-fig. 15 positioned be-tween the backrest and rear bag. Then, fitthe upper belt (provided with the childseat) in the supplied ring D-fig. 16 locat-ed at the back of the backrest near thechild seat.

fig. 16 F0H0143m

Remember that only Universal Isofix childseats bearing the type-approval text “ECER44/03 Universal Isofix” can be used.

Universal Isofix “Duo Plus” child seat isavailable from Lineaccessori Fiat.

For further details about the installa-tion/use of child seats, refer to the “In-structions Manual” of the child seat.

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 104

105

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON UNIVERSAL ISOFIX CHILD SEAT USE

The table below shows the different installation possibilities of Isofix restraint systems on seats fitted with Universal Isofix fasten-ers in compliance with European standard ECE 16.

Weight group Orientation Class Isofix positionchild seat Isofix size rear side

Group 0 up to 10 kg

Group 0+ up to 13 kg

Group 1 from 9up to 18 kg

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing backwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

Facing forwards

E

E

D

C

D

C

B

B1

A

IL

IL

IL

IL (*)

IL

IL (*)

IUF

IUF

IUF

IUF suitable for Isofix child restraint systems facing forwards, universal class (fitted with third upper fastener), type-ap-proved for the relevant weight group.

IL: suitable for special child restraint systems, specific Isofix type, and type-approved for this type of car. The seat can beinstalled by moving the front seat forward.

(*) The Isofix child seat can be installed by moving the front seat all the way up.

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 105

106

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

FRONT AND SIDE AIRBAGS

The car is fitted with front air bags for thedriver and for the passenger, and windowbags (head protection system); upon re-quest the car can be fitted also with frontside bags;

The front air bag (driver and passenger)has been designed to protect the occu-pants in the event of head-on crashes ofmedium-high severity, by placing the cush-ion between the occupant and the steer-ing wheel or dashboard.

Front air bags are designed to protectcar’s occupants in front crashes and there-fore non-activation in other types of col-lisions (side collisions, rear shunts, roll-overs, etc.) is not a system malfunction.

In case of crash, an electronic control unit,when required, triggers the inflation of thecushion. The cushion immediately inflates, placingitself as a protection between the bodyof the front occupants and the structurethat could cause injuries. Immediately af-ter, the cushion deflates.

The front air bag (driver and passenger) isnot a replacement of but complementaryto the use of belts, which should alwaysbe worn, as specified by law in Europe andmost non European countries.

In case of crash, a person not wearing theseat belt moves forward and may come in-to contact with the cushion while it is stillinflating. Under this circumstance the pro-tection offered by the air bag is reduced.

Front air bag may not be activated in thefollowing situations:

❒ in collisions against highly deformableobjects not affecting the vehicle frontsurface (e.g. bumper collision againstguard rail, etc.);

❒ in case of wedging under other vehi-cles or protective barriers (for exam-ple under a truck or guard rail), the airbag is not triggered as it offers no ad-ditional protection compared with theseat belts, consequently it would bepointless. Therefore, failure to comeinto action in the above circumstancedoes not mean that the system is notworking properly.

The driver’s and passenger’s front Air bagshave been designed and calibrated to im-prove the protection of a person wear-ing seat belts.

At its maximum inflation, its volume fillsmost of the space between the dashboardand the passenger.

DRIVER’S FRONT AIR BAG fig. 17

It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained in a special recess in the cen-tre of the steering wheel.

fig. 17 F0H0746m

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 106

107

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

fig. 18 F0H0145m

PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAGfig. 18

It consists of an instant-inflating cushioncontained in a special recess A in the dash-board and the cushion has a volume big-ger than that of the driver.

In minor crashes (for which the restrain-ing action of the seat belts is sufficient), theair bags are not deployed. Also in this caseit is of vital importance to wear the seatbelts since in case of side crash they guar-antee proper positioning of the occupantand prevent the occupants to be pitchedout of the car in case of violent crashes.

Do not apply stickers or oth-er objects on the steering

wheel, in area A-fig.18 of the passen-ger’s air bag or on the side covering.Never put objects on the dashboardon the passenger’s side because theymay interfere with the correct air bagdeployment and cause serious injuriesto the car occupants.

WARNING

SERIOUS DANGER: The caris fitted with an air bag on

the passenger’s side. Never place cra-dle child’s seats on the front passen-ger’s seat of cars fitted with passen-ger’s air bag since the air bag activa-tion could cause serious injuries, evenmortal.

WARNING

On cars provided with frontpassenger's air bag, the airbag shall be deactivatedwhen placing a child' seaton the front passenger'sseat. The front passenger

seat shall be adjusted in the mostbackward position to prevent anycontact between child’ seat and dash-board. Even if not compulsory by law,you are recommended to reactivatethe air bag immediately as soon aschild transport is no longer necessary.

WARNING

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 107

108

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

To manually deactivate thepassenger’s front airbag and

the Side Bag (where provided), referto paragraph “Multifunctional re-configurable display” in section“Dashboard and controls”.

WARNING

MANUAL DEACTIVATION OFFRONT AIRBAG AND SIDEBAGON PASSENGER’S SIDE (where provided)

Whenever a child needs to be carried onthe front seat, the passenger’s front airbagand the Side Bag (where provided) mustbe deactivated.

The warning light “ on the instrumentpanel stays on steadily until the passenger’sfront airbag and the Side Bag (where pro-vided) are re-activated.

SIDE AIR BAGS (where fitted)(Side bag - Windowbag)

SIDE BAGS fig. 19

They are formed of an instantaneously-in-flating cushion housed in the back rest offront seats and their task is to increaseprotection of the occupants in the eventof a side crash of medium-high severity.

Covers for Side bag seats are available atLineaccessori Fiat.

The side air bag is not a replacement ofbut complementary to the use of belts,which should always be worn, as specifiedby law in Europe and most non Europeancountries.

IMPORTANT In the event of side crash,you can obtain the best protection by thesystem keeping a correct position on theseat, allowing thus a correct window bagunfolding.

Do not cover the back rest offront seats with trims or cov-

ers there are not set for the use of sidebags.

WARNING

WINDOW BAGS fig. 20

They are “curtain” cushions located be-hind the side coverings of the roof andcovered by proper finishings, studied forthe head protection to offer the best pro-tection to the front and rear occupantsin the event of side crash, thanks to thewide cushion inflation surface.

fig. 19 F0H0147m

fig. 20 F0H0148m

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 108

109

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

IMPORTANT The front air bags and/orside bags may be deployed if the car is sub-ject to heavy knocks or accidents involv-ing the underbody area, such as for ex-ample violent shocks against steps, kerbsor low obstacles, falling of the car in bigholes or sags in the road.

IMPORTANT When the air bag inflatesit emits a small amount of dusts. Thesedusts are harmless and is not the begin-ning of a fire; then the unfold cushion sur-face and the car interiors can be coveredby a dusty remains: this dust can irritateskin and eyes. In case of contact, washyourself using neutral soap and water.

The air bag system has a validity of 14years as to the pyrotechnic charge, and 10years as to the twisted contact. As thisdate approaches, contact Fiat Dealershipto have it replaced.

IMPORTANT Should an accident occur inwhich any of the safety devices is activat-ed, take the car to a Fiat Dealership tohave the devices activated replaced and tohave the system checked.

All check, repair and replacement opera-tions concerning the air bags must only becarried out c/o Fiat Dealership.

If you are having the car scrapped, havethe air bag system deactivated at a FiatDealership first. If the car changes own-ership, the new owner must be informedof the method of use of air bags and theabove warnings and also be given this“Owner handbook”.

IMPORTANT The triggering of preten-sioners, front air bags and front side bagsis decided in a differentiated manner. Thefailure to deploy one or more of themdoes not mean that the system is notworking properly.

Never rest head, arms andelbows on the door, on the

windows and in the window bag areato prevent possible injuries during theinflation phase.

WARNING

Never put head, arms and el-bows out of the window.

WARNING

If warning light ¬ does notcome on when turning the

key to MAR or if it stays on whentravelling it could indicate a failure inrestraint systems; in this case air bagsor pretensioners could not trigger inthe event of an accident, or in a re-stricted numbers of cases they couldtrigger accidentally. Stop the car andcontact Fiat Dealership to have thesystem checked immediately.

WARNING

GENERAL WARNINGS

Do not cover the back rest offront seats with trims or cov-

ers there are not set for the use of sidebags.

WARNING

Always keep your hands onthe steering wheel rim when

driving, so that if the air bag is trig-gered, it can inflate without meetingany obstacles which could cause seri-ous harm to you. Do not drive withthe body bent forwards, keep the seatback rest in the erect position andlean your back well against it.

WARNING

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 109

110

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CO

NTRO

LSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

If the car has been stolen oran attempt to steal it has

been made, if it has been subjected tovandals or floods, have the air bagsystem checked by Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

Remember that with the keyengaged and in the MAR po-

sition, even with the engine not run-ning, the air bags may be triggered ona stationary vehicle if it is bumped byanother moving car. Therefore, nev-er seat children on the front seat evenwhen the vehicle is stationary. On theother hand remember that if the keyis at STOP, no safety system (air bagsor pretensioners) is triggered in theevent of an impact; in these case, fail-ure to come into action cannot beconsidered as a sign that the systemis not working properly.

WARNING

Never travel with objects onyour lap, in front of your

chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. be-tween your lips; injury may result inthe event of the air bag being trig-gered.

WARNING

When the ignition key isturned to the MAR position,

the warning light “ (with passenger’sfront air bag deactivation (with pas-senger air bag active) turns on andflashes for few seconds to remind thatpassenger’s air bag will be deployedin a crash, after which it should go off.

WARNING

Do not wash the seat backrest with pressurised water

or steam (by hand or at automaticseat washing stations).

WARNING

The front air bag is triggeredfor shocks greater in magni-

tude than the pretensioners. For im-pacts between these two thresholds,it is therefore normal that only thepretensioners are triggered.

WARNING

Do not hook rigid objects tothe coat hooks and to the

support handles.

WARNING

The air bag does not substi-tute the seat belts, but only

increases their effectiveness. More-over, since the front air bags do notcome into operation in the event offront impact at low speed, side colli-sions, bumps from behind or over-turning, in these circumstances theoccupants would only be protectedby the seat belts which must thereforealways be fastened.

WARNING

093-110 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:28 Pagina 110

111

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

ENGINE STARTING............................................................ 112PARKING................................................................................ 114USING THE GEARBOX...................................................... 115CONTAINING RUNNING COSTS ................................ 116TOWING TRAILERS ........................................................... 117SNOW TYRES....................................................................... 120SNOW CHAINS ................................................................... 121CAR INACTIVITY ............................................................... 122

CCCOORRRREECCTT UUSSEE OOFF TTHHEE CCAARR

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 111

112

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARENGINE STARTING

The car is fitted with an electronic enginelock device. If the engine fails to start, seeparagraph “Fiat CODE system” in section“Dashboard and controls”.

The engine may be noisier than usual dur-ing the first seconds of operation, espe-cially after it has not been used for a while.This characteristic feature of the hydraulictappet system does not compromise func-tionality or reliability. The system devisedfor the Fiat Idea was designed to limitmaintenance interventions.

STARTING PROCEDURE FOR PETROL VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ Ensure that the handbrake is up;

❒ Put the gear lever into neutral;

❒ Press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelera-tor;

❒ Turn the ignition key to AVV and letit go the moment the engine starts.

If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

If, when the ignition key is on MAR, warn-ing light Y remains lit together withwarning light U, turn the key to STOP

Running the engine in con-fined areas is extremely dan-

gerous. The engine consumes oxygenand produces carbon monoxidewhich is a highly toxic and lethal gas.

WARNINGand then back to MAR; if the warning lightremains on, try with the other keys pro-vided with the car.

If you are still unable to start the engine,perform the emergency start-up proce-dure (see “Emergency start-up” in section“In an emergency”) and contact Fiat Deal-ership.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyat MAR when the engine is off. STARTING PROCEDURE FOR

Multijet VERSIONS

Proceed as follows:

❒ Ensure that the handbrake is up;

❒ Put the gear lever into neutral;

❒ Turn the ignition key to MAR: thewarning lights m, U and Y willlight up on the instrument panel;

❒ Wait for the warning lights Y andm. The hotter the engine is, thequicker this will happen;

❒ Press the clutch pedal down to thefloor without touching the accelera-tor;

We recommend that duringthe initial period you do notdrive to full vehicle perfor-mance (e.g.: excessive accel-

eration, long journeys at top speed,sharp braking, etc.).

When the engine is switchedoff never leave the ignitionkey in the MAR position toprevent pointless current ab-

sorption from draining the battery.

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 112

113

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

❒ Turn the ignition key to AVV as soonas warning light m goes out. If you waittoo long you will lose the benefit ofthe work done by the glow plugs. Re-lease the key as soon as the enginestarts.

IMPORTANT With cold engine, the ac-celerator pedal shall be completely re-leased while turning the ignition key toAVV.

If the engine does not start at the first at-tempt, return the ignition key to STOPbefore repeating starting.

If, when the ignition key is on MAR, warn-ing light Y remains lit, turn the key toSTOP and then back to MAR; if thewarning light remains on, try with the oth-er keys provided with the car.

If you still cannot start the engine, contactFiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT Never leave the ignition keyat MAR when the engine is off.

The warning light m willflash for 60 seconds at start-up or during prolonged crank-ing to signal a fault in the

glow plug heating system. You can usethe car as usual if the engine starts butyou should contact a Fiat Dealershipas soon as possible.

HOW TO WARM UP THE ENGINE AFTER IT HAS JUST STARTED (petrol and Multijet versions)

Proceed as follows:

❒ Drive off slowly, letting the engine turnat medium revs. Do not accelerateabruptly;

❒ Do not drive at full performance forthe initial kilometres. Wait until thecoolant temperature gauge startsmoving.

STOPPING THE ENGINE

Turn the ignition to STOP while the en-gine is idling.

IMPORTANT After a taxing drive, youshould allow the engine to “catch itsbreath” before turning it off by letting itidle to allow the temperature in the en-gine compartment to fall.

Never bump start the engineby pushing, towing or coast-ing downhill. This could causefuel to flow into the catalyt-

ic exhaust system and damage it be-yond repair.

A quick burst on the acceler-ator before turning off the en-gine serves absolutely nopractical purpose, it wastes

fuel and is damaging especially to tur-bocharged engines.

Remember that the servo-brake and power steering

are not operational until the enginehas been started, therefore much ef-fort than usual is required on thebrake pedal and steering wheel.

WARNING

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 113

114

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARPARKING

Proceed as follows:

❒ stop the engine and engage the hand-brake;

❒ engage a gear (on a slope, engage firstgear if the car is faced uphill or reverseif it is faced downhill) and leave thewheels steered.

Block the wheels with a wedge or a stoneif the car is parked on a steep slope. Avoidleaving the car parked with a wheel on thesidewalk or steered against the kerb. Donot leave the ignition key at MAR to pre-vent draining the battery. Always removethe key when you leave the car.

HANDBRAKE

The handbrake lever is located betweenthe two front seats.

Pull the handbrake lever upwards until thecar cannot be moved.

Four or five clicks are generally enoughwhen the car is on level ground while nineor ten may be required if the car is on asteep slope or laden.

IMPORTANT If this is not the case, con-tact Fiat Dealership to have the handbrakeadjusted.

When the handbrake lever is pulled upand the ignition key is at MAR the panelwarning light x will come on.

To release the handbrake:

❒ slightly lift the handbrake and press re-lease button A-fig. 1;

❒ keep button A pressed in and lowerthe lever. Warning light xwill go out.

Press the brake pedal when carrying outthis operation to prevent the car frommoving accidentally.

IMPORTANT If the handbrake lever tendsto approach the end of stroke (slot oncentral console), contact Fiat Dealershipto have the handbrake adjusted.

fig. 1 F0H0149m

Never leave children unat-tended in the car. Always re-

move the ignition key when leavingthe car and take it out with you.

WARNING

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 114

115

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

USING THE GEARBOX

To engage the gears, press the clutch ped-al fully and shift the gear lever into one ofthe required positions (the diagram isshown on the knob).

IMPORTANT The car can only be put in-to reverse gear when it has stopped mov-ing completely. With the engine running,before engaging the reverse, wait at least2 seconds with the clutch pedal fully downto prevent damage and grating of thegears.

To engage 6th gear (where fitted), press thelever to the right to prevent engaging 4th

gear by mistake. A similar action is re-quired to shift down from 6th to 5th

To engage reverse R from neutral, lift thesliding ring A-fig. 2-3 under the knob andshift the lever to the right and back (onlyfor petrol versions).

For Multijet versions, just shift lever to theright and back.

fig. 2 F0H0150m fig. 3 F0H0353m

To change gears properlyyou must push the clutch

pedal fully down. It is therefore es-sential that there is nothing under thepedals: make sure mats are lying flatand do not get in the way of the ped-als.

WARNING Do not drive with your handresting on the gear lever asthe force exerted, even ifslight, could lead over time to

premature wear on the gearbox inter-nal components.

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 115

116

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARCONTAININGRUNNING COSTS

Here are some suggestions which mayhelp you to keep the running costs of yourcar down and lower the amount of toxicemissions released into the atmosphere.

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS

Car maintenance

Have checks and adjustments carried outin accordance with the “Service schedule”.

Tyres

Check the pressure of the tyres routine-ly at an interval of no more than 4 weeks:if the pressure is too low, consumptionlevels increase as resistance to rolling ishigher.

Unnecessary loads

Do not travel with too much luggagestowed in the boot. The weight of the car(especially when driving in town) and itstrim greatly affects consumption and sta-bility.

Roof rack/ski rack

Remove the roof rack or the ski rack fromthe roof as soon as they are no longerused. These accessories lower air pene-tration and adversely affect consumptionlevels. When needing to carry particular-ly voluminous objects, preferably use atrailer.

Electric devices

Use electric devices only for the amountof time needed. Rear heated window, ad-ditional headlights, windscreen wipers andheater fan need a considerable amount ofenergy, therefore increasing the require-ment of current increases fuel consump-tion (up to +25% in the urban cycle).

Climate control

The air conditioner is an additional loadwhich greatly affects the engine leading tohigher consumption (on average up to+20%). When the temperature outsidethe vehicle permits it, use the air ventswhere possible.

Spoilers

The use of non-certified aerodynamicitems may adversely affect air drag andconsumption levels.

DRIVING STYLE

Starting

Do not warm the engine with the car ata standstill or at idle or high speed: underthese conditions the engine warms upmuch more slowly, increasing electricalconsumption and emissions. It is thereforeadvisable to move off immediately, slow-ly, avoiding high speeds. This way the en-gine will warm faster.

Unnecessary actions

Avoid accelerating when waiting at trafficlights or before switching off the engine.This and also double declutching is ab-solutely pointless on modern cars and al-so increase consumption and pollution.

Gear selection

As soon as the conditions of the traffic androad allow, use a higher gear. Using a lowgear to obtain brilliant performance in-creases consumption.

In the same way improper use of a highgear increases consumption, emissions anengine wear.

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 116

117

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

Top speed

Fuel consumption considerably increaseswith speed. Keep speed as constant aspossible, avoid superfluous braking and ac-celerating, which cost in terms of both fu-el and emissions.

Acceleration

Accelerating violently increasing the revswill greatly affect consumption and emis-sions: acceleration should be gradual andshould not exceed the maximum torque.

CONDITIONS OF USE

Cold starting

Short journeys and frequent cold starts donot allow the engine to reach optimumoperating temperature. This results in asignificant increase in consumption levels(from +15 to +30% on the urban cycle)and emission of harmful substances.

Traffic situations and road conditions

Rather high consumption levels are tied tosituations with heavy traffic, for examplein queues with frequent use of the lowergears or in cities with many traffic lights.Also winding mountain roads and roughroad surfaces adversely affect consump-tion.

Traffic hold-ups

During prolonged hold-ups (e.g.: levelcrossings) the engine should be switchedoff.

TOWING TRAILERS

IMPORTANT NOTES

For towing caravans or trailers the carmust be fitted with a certified tow hookand an adequate electric system. Installa-tion should be carried out by specialisedpersonnel who release a special documentfor circulation on the road.

Install any specific and/or additional rear-view mirrors as specified by law.

Remember that when towing a trailer,steep hills are harder to climb, the brak-ing spaces increase and overtaking takeslonger depending on the overall weight.

Engage a low gear when driving downhill,rather than constantly using the brake.

The weight the trailer exerts on the cartow hook reduces by the same amountthe actual vehicle loading capacity. Tomake sure the maximum towable weightis not exceeded (given in the log book) ac-count should be taken of the fully ladentrailer, including accessories and person-al belongings.

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 117

118

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARDo not exceed the speed limits of thecountry you are driving in. In any case donot exceed 100 km/h.

The ABS system with whichthe car may be fitted does

not control the trailer braking system.Great care should therefore be takenwhen driving on slippery road sur-faces.

Under no circumstancesshould the vehicle brake sys-

tem be altered to control the trailerbrake. The trailer braking systemmust be fully independent of the ve-hicle’s hydraulic system.

WARNING

WARNING

INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK

The towing device should be fastened tothe body by specialised personnel ac-cording to any additional and/or integra-tive information supplied by the Manufac-turer of the device.

The towing device must meet current reg-ulations with reference to 94/20/EC Di-rective and subsequent amendments.

For any version the towing device usedmust match the towable weight of the ve-hicle on which it is to be installed.

For the electric connection a unified con-nector should be used which is generallyplaced on a special bracket normally fas-tened to the towing device, and a specialECU for external trailer light control shallbe installed on the car.

For the electrical connection 7 or 13 pins12VDC connection is to be used (CU-NA/UNI and ISO/DIN Standards). Followthe instructions provided by the car man-ufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufac-turer.

An electric brake should be supplied di-rectly by the battery through a cable witha cross section of no less than 2.5 mm2.

IMPORTANT Electric brake or other de-vice shall be used with running engine.

In addition to the electrical branches, thecar’s electric system can only be con-nected to the supply cable for an electricbrake and to the cable for an internal light,though not above 15W.

For connections use a preset control unitwith battery cable no less than 2.5 mm2.

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 118

119

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

F0H0151m

Assembly diagram fig. 4

The tow hook structure must be fastenedin the points shown by the symbol Ø us-ing a total of 4 M8 screws, 2 M10 screwsand 2 M12 screws.

The hook should be fastened to the bodyavoiding any type of drilling and trimmingof the rear bumpers that remains visiblewhen the hook is removed.

IMPORTANT It is compulsory to fasten alabel (plainly visible) of suitable size andmaterial with the following wording:

MAX LOAD ON BALL 60 kg

After fitting, screw holesshall be sealed to prevent ex-

haust gas inlet.

WARNING

fig. 4

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 119

120

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARSNOW TYRES

Use snow tyres of the same size as thenormal tyres provided with the car.

Fiat Dealership will be happy to provideadvice concerning the most suitable typeof tyre for the customer’s requirements.

For the type of tyre to be used, inflationpressures and the specifications of snowtyres, follow the instructions given in para-graph “Wheels” in section “Technicalspecifications”.

The winter features of these tyres are re-duced considerably when the tread depthis below 4 mm. In this case, they shouldbe replaced.

Due to the snow tyre features, under nor-mal conditions of use or on long motor-way journeys, the performance of thesetyres is lower than that of normal tyres. Itis therefore necessary to limit their use tothe purposes for which they are certified.

IMPORTANT When snow tyres are usedwith a max speed index below the onethat can be reached by the car (increasedby 5%), place a notice in the passengercompartment, plainly in the driver’s viewwhich states the max permissible speed ofthe snow tyres (as per EC Directive).

All four tyres should be the same (brandand track) to ensure greater safety whendriving and braking and better driveabili-ty.

Remember that it is inappropriate tochange the direction of rotation of tyres.

The max speed for snowtyres with “T” marking is 190

km/h. The Road Traffic Code speedlimits must however be always strict-ly observed.

WARNING

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 120

121

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

SNOW CHAINS

Use of snow chains should be in compli-ance with local regulations.

Snow chains should only be applied to thedriving wheels (front wheels). We rec-ommend using Lineaccessori Fiat snowchains.

Check the tension of the chains after dri-ving some ten metres.

IMPORTANT Snow chains cannot be fit-ted to the space-saver spare wheel. So, ifa front (drive) wheel is punctured andchains are needed, a rear wheel should befitted to the front of the vehicle and thespare wheel should be fitted to the rear.This way with two normal drive wheels,snow chains can be fitted to them to solvean emergency.

IMPORTANT Tyres 205/50 R16 87V can-not be fitted with snow chains.

Versions

ACTIVE

DYNAMIC

EMOTION

Tyres on which chains can be fitted

185/65 R14 86T195/60 R15 88T

195/60 R15 88T

195/60 R15 88T

Type of snow chains to be used

Snow chains with standard size with max protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.

Keep your speeddown when snowchains are fitted. Donot exceed 50 km/h.

Avoid potholes, steps and pavementsand avoid also to drive for long dis-tances on roads not covered with snowto prevent damaging the car and theroadbed.

Refer to the above mentionedtable for information on thewheels where snow chains canbe fitted. Follow the prescrip-

tions.

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 121

122

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARCAR INACTIVITY

If the car is to be left inactive for longerthan a month, the following precautionsshould be noted:

❒ park the car in covered, dry and if pos-sible well-ventilated premises;

❒ engage a gear;

❒ check that the handbrake is not en-gaged;

❒ disconnect battery terminals (first dis-connect the negative terminal) andcheck the battery charge. This checkis to be repeated every three monthswhen the car is left inactive. Rechargeif the optical indicator shows a darkcolour without the central green area;

❒ clean and protect the painted parts us-ing protective wax;

❒ clean and protect the shiny metalparts using special compounds readi-ly available;

❒ sprinkle talcum powder on the rub-ber windscreen and rear windowwiper blades and lift them off theglass;

❒ slightly open the windows;

❒ cover the car with a cloth or perfo-rated plastic sheet. Do not use sheetsof non-perforated plastic as they donot allow moisture on the car body toevaporate;

❒ inflate tyres to +0.5 bar above thenormal specified pressure and check itat intervals;

❒ if you don’t disconnect the batteryfrom the electric system, check itscharge every month and recharge it ifthe optical indicator shows a darkcolour without the central green area;

❒ do not drain the engine cooling sys-tem.

111-122 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 122

123

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

GENERAL WARNINGS...................................................... 124

LOW BRAKE FLUID LEVEL .............................................. 124

HANDBRAKE ON ............................................................... 124

AIRBAG FAILURE................................................................. 124

HOT ENGINE COOLANT................................................ 125

LOW BATTERY CHARGE................................................. 125

LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE ......................................... 126

EXHAUSTED OIL................................................................. 126

“DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FAILURE............................................................. 126

INCOMPLETE DOOR LOCKING ................................... 126

SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED ......................................... 126

EBD FAILURE......................................................................... 127

INJECTION SYSTEM FAILURE ......................................... 127

EOBD ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE ........... 127

FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG DISABLED .................... 128

ABS SYSTEM FAILURE ........................................................ 128

FUEL RESERVE....................................................................... 128

GLOW PLUG HEATING.................................................... 129

GLOW PLUG HEATING FAILURE.................................. 129

WATER IN DIESEL FUEL FILTER..................................... 129

CAR PROTECTION SYSTEM FAULT - FIAT CODE.. 129

REAR FOG LIGHTS ............................................................. 129

GENERAL FAILURE INDICATION ................................. 130

WWWAARRNNIINNGG LLIIGGHHTTSS AANNDD MMEESSSSAAGGEEESSBRAKE PAD WEAR ............................................................. 131

PARTICULATE FILTER CLOGGED................................. 131

SIDE/TAIL LIGHTS AND LOW BEAMS ......................... 131

FOLLOW ME HOME ......................................................... 131

FRONT FOG LIGHTS ......................................................... 131

LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ....................... 132

RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR ................... 132

“DUALDRIVE” ELECTRIC POWER STEERINGACTIVATION........................................................................ 132

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM............................................ 132

MAIN BEAMS......................................................................... 132

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD.................................................. 132

LIMITED RANGE .................................................................. 132

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 123

124

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

GENERAL WARNINGS

Lighting of a warning light is associated toa specific message and/or buzzer when ap-plicable. These indications are brief andprecautionary and as such must not beconsidered as exhaustive and/or alterna-tive to the information contained in theOwner’s Handbook, which you are rec-ommended to read carefully in all cases.Always refer to the information inthis chapter in the event of a failureindication.

IMPORTANT Failure indications on thedisplay fall into either of two categories:serious failure and less serious failure.

Serious failures indicate a “cycle” ofwarning messages that stay on until thecause of the failure is eliminated.

Less serious failures are indicated by alimited warning “cycle”.

Press MODE to stop the warning cycle inboth cases. The warning light on the in-strument panel will stay on until the causeof the failure is eliminated.

LOW BRAKE FLUIDLEVEL (red)

HANDBRAKE ON (red)

When the ignition key is moved to MARthe warning light turns on and should gooff after a few seconds.

Low brake fluid level

The warning light turns on when the lev-el of the brake fluid in the reservoir fallsbelow the minimum level due to possibleleaks in the circuit.

The display will show the dedicated mes-sage.

xHandbrake on

The warning light turns on when the hand-brake is on.

On certain versions, if the car is movingthe buzzer also triggers.

IMPORTANT If the warning light turns onwhen travelling, check that the handbrakeis not engaged.

AIRBAG FAILURE (red)

When the ignition key ismoved to MAR, the warning

light turns on and should go off after a fewseconds.

The warning light stays on steady if thereis a failure in the airbag system.


¬

If the warning light x turnson when the car is travelling

(together with the message on the dis-play on certain versions) stop the en-gine immediately and contact a FiatDealership.

WARNING

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 124

125

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

If when turning the key toMAR the warning light ¬

does not turn on or stays on duringcar travel (together with the messageon the multifunctional display, whereprovided), a failure may have oc-curred in the restraint systems. In thiscase the airbags or pretensioners maynot be deployed after an impact or,in a minor number of cases, they maybe deployed accidentally. Contact Fi-at Dealership immediately to havethe system checked immediately.

WARNING

The failure of the warninglight ¬ is indicated by the

warning light flashing longer than theexpected 4 seconds “ thus signallingthat the front passenger airbag is de-activated. In addition, the airbag sys-tem automatically disables the airbagon the passenger’s side (both frontand side airbags, where provided). Inthis case, the warning light ¬ doesnot necessarily indicate a failure inthe restraining systems. Contact FiatDealership immediately to have thesystem checked.

WARNING

HOT ENGINECOOLANT (red)



The warning light turns on when the en-gine is overheated.

If the warning light comes on, proceed asfollows:

❒ during normal travel: stop the car,stop the engine and check that the wa-ter level in the vessel is not under theMIN line. If this is the case, wait for afew minutes for the engine to cooldown. Then, slowly and carefully openthe cap, top-up with coolant and checkthat the level is between the MIN andMAX reference lines on the vessel. Al-so check for leakages. Should the warn-ing light turn on again at the next start-up, contact Fiat Dealership.

u❒ If the vehicle is used under severe

conditions (e.g. towing of trailers up-hill or fully loaded vehicle): slow downand stop the car if the warning lightstays on. Stop for 2 or 3 minutes withthe engine running and slightly accel-erated to favour better coolant circu-lation. Then stop the engine. Checkcorrect fluid level as described above.

IMPORTANT Under severe use of thecar, keep the engine on and slightly accel-erated for a few minutes before switchingit off.


LOW BATTERYCHARGE (red)


light turns on and should go out as soonas the engine is started (with the enginerunning at idle speed a brief delay in go-ing out is allowed). If the warning lightstays on, immediately contact Fiat Deal-ership.

w

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 125

126

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

LOW ENGINE OILPRESSURE (red)

EXHAUSTED OIL (red)(Multijet versions with DPF)

Low engine oil pressure

When the ignition key is moved to MAR,the warning light turns on and should goout as soon as the engine is started.


v

Exhausted oil

The warning light turns on and flashesalong with the message on the displaywhen the system detects that the engineoil is exhausted.

After the first indication, at each enginestart-up, the warning light v contin-ues to flash for about 60 seconds and thenevery 2 hours until the oil is changed.

“DUALDRIVE”ELECTRIC POWER STEERING FAILURE(red)

When the ignition key is moved to MAR,the warning light turns on and should gooff after a few seconds.

If the warning light stays on, the electricsteering system provides no assistance andthe effort on the steering wheel is in-creased, although steering is still possible.In this case, go to a Fiat Dealership.


g

INCOMPLETE DOORLOCKING (red)

On certain versions the warn-ing light turns on when one or

more doors or the tailgate are not prop-erly closed.


A buzzer is triggered when doors/tailgateare open and the car is moving.

´

SEAT BELTS NOTFASTENED (red)(where provided)

The warning light on the displaylights up when the car is moving and thedriver’s seat belt is not correctly fastened.The warning light flashes, and a buzzer istriggered, if the driver’s seat belt is notcorrectly fastened. The buzzer of theS.B.R. (Seat Belt Reminder) system can bedisabled by the Fiat Dealership only. Thesystem can be enabled from the “setup”menu.

<If the warning light vturns on when the car is trav-

elling (on certain versions togetherwith the message on the display) stopthe engine immediately and contactFiat Dealership.

WARNING

If the warning light vflashes, promptly contact

Fiat Dealership in order to have theoil changed and the warning light onthe instrument panel turned off.

WARNING

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 126

127

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

>EBD FAILURE(red) (amber)

Simultaneous turning on of the warninglights x and > the engine is running in-dicates an EBD system failure or non-avail-ability of the system. Early locking of therear wheels may occur in the event of vi-olent braking causing the car to swerve.Drive very carefully to a Fiat Dealershipto have the system inspected.


x

INJECTION SYSTEMFAILURE (Multijetversions - amber)

EOBD ENGINE CONTROLSYSTEM FAILURE(petrol versions - amber)

Injection system failure

When the ignition key is moved to MAR,the warning light turns on and should goout as soon as the engine is started.

If the warning light stays on or turns onduring car travel, it indicates that the in-jection system is not operating correctly,which could cause reduced performance,poor drivability and high consumption lev-els.


In these conditions, the car can continuetravelling at moderate speed without de-manding excessive effort from the engine.In any case, go to a Fiat Dealership as soonas possible.

EOBD engine control systemfailure

Under normal conditions, when the igni-tion key is moved to MAR, the warninglight turns on and should go off after en-gine start-up. This indicates that the warn-ing light is working correctly. If the warn-ing light either stays on or comes on dur-ing car travel:

❒ steady light: indicates a fault in the sup-ply/ignition system which could causehigh emissions at the exhaust, possiblereduced performances, poor drivabili-ty and high consumption levels.

U


In these conditions, the car can continuetravelling at moderate speed without de-manding excessive effort from the engine.Prolonged use of the car with the warn-ing light on may cause damage. Go to a Fi-at Dealership as soon as possible. Thewarning light goes out after the fault iscleared, and the indication is stored in thesystem.

❒ flashing light: indicates the possibility ofdamage to the catalyser (see “EOBDsystem” in section “Dashboard andcontrols”).

If the warning light flashes, release the ac-celerator pedal to lower the speed of theengine until the warning light stops flash-ing; continue the journey at moderatespeed, trying to avoid driving conditionsthat may cause further flashing. Finally,contact Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-ble.

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 127

128

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

FRONT PASSENGERAIRBAG DISABLED(amber)

The warning light “ comes onwhen the front passenger’s airbag is dis-abled.

With the front passenger’s airbag on,when the ignition key is moved to MAR,the warning light “ comes on steadily forabout 4 seconds; then, it continues to flashfor 4 seconds and finally goes off.

“

ABS SYSTEM FAILURE(amber)



The warning light lights up when the sys-tem is either not working or not available.In this case, the braking system preservesits efficiency unaltered without, howev-er, offering the extra operating capacity ofthe ABS system. Drive carefully and go toa Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.


>

FUEL RESERVE (amber)



The warning light turns on when about 6to 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank.

IMPORTANT The warning light flashes toindicate a system failure. Go to a Fiat Deal-ership to have the system checked.

KWhen the warning lightcomes on, “ it indicates that

a light failure has occurred ¬. In ad-dition, the airbag system automati-cally disables the airbag on the pas-senger’s side (both front and sideairbags, where provided). Contact Fi-at Dealership immediately to havethe system checked.

WARNINGGo to a Fiat Dealership assoon as possible if the warn-ing light U does not light upwhen the key is turned to

MAR or if, during car travel, the warn-ing light comes on either steady orblinking (along with a message on thedisplay). The operation of the warninglight U may be checked by the traf-fic police using specific devices. Followthe laws in force in the country whereyou are driving.

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 128

129

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

GLOW PLUG HEATING (Multijet versions - amber)

GLOW PLUG HEATINGFAILURE (Multijet versions -amber)

Glow plug heating

The warning light goes on when the key isturned to MAR. It goes out as soon as theglow plugs have reached the preset tem-perature. Start the engine as soon as thewarning light goes out.

IMPORTANT At high ambient tempera-tures the warning light stays on for an ex-tremely short time.

Glow plug heating failure

The warning light flashes in the event ofa failure in the glow plug heating system.Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon as possi-ble.


m

WATER IN DIESELFUEL FILTER (Multijet versions - amber)

When the ignition key is movedto MAR, the warning light turns on andshould go off after a few seconds.

The warning light c turns on when thereis water in the diesel fuel filter.


cCAR PROTECTIONSYSTEM FAULT - FIATCODE (amber)

Turning the key to MAR, thewarning light flashes once and then goesoff.

If the warning light stays on with the igni-tion key positioned on MAR, a failure mayhave occurred (see “Fiat Code system” insection “Dashboard and controls”).

IMPORTANT Simultaneous turning on ofthe warning lights U and Y indicates afailure in the Fiat CODE system.

If the warning light Y flashes with the en-gine running, the car is not protected bythe engine inhibitor device (see “Fiat Codesystem” in section “Dashboard and con-trols”).

Contact Fiat Dealership to have all thekeys stored.

Y

REAR FOG LIGHTS(amber)

The warning light comes onwhen the fog lights are turnedon.

4

The presence of water in thesupply circuit may cause se-vere damage to the injectionsystem and irregular engine

operation. If the warning light c goeson (with the message on the display onsome versions), go to a Fiat Dealershipas soon as possible to remove cloggingfrom the system. Whenever the warn-ing light comes on immediately afterrefuelling, water may have been intro-duced in the tank. In this case, stop theengine immediately and contact a FiatDealership.

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 129

130

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

GENERAL FAILUREINDICATION (amber)

The warning light turns on in thefollowing circumstances.

External light failure

The warning light comes on (on some ver-sions only) when a failure is detected inone of the following lights:

– tail lights

– stop lights (excluding 3rd stop)

– rear fog lights

– direction indicators

– plate lights.

The fault identified in the lights above maybe due to: one or more burnt lamps, ablown protection fuse or interruption ofthe electrical connection.


è Fresh air filter clogged(where provided)

The warning light turns on when the par-ticulate filter is clogged and the drivingconditions do not enable automatic acti-vation of the regeneration procedure.

To allow the regeneration procedure,keep the car running until the warning lightturns off.


Engine oil pressure sensor failure

The warning light turns on when a failureis detected in the engine oil pressure sen-sor. Go to a Fiat Dealership as soon aspossible.

Twilight/rain sensor failure

The warning light turns on when a failureis detected in the twilight/rain sensors. Goto a Fiat Dealership as soon as possible.


Fuel cut-off switch tripped

The warning light comes on when the fu-el cut-off switch trips.


Speed limit exceeded

The display shows the dedicated messagewhen the car exceeds the set speed limit(see “Multifunction Display” in section“Dashboard and controls”).

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 130

131

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

BRAKE PAD WEAR(amber)

The warning light goes on if thefront brake pads are worn. In this

case replace them as soon as possible.


dPARTICULATE FILTERCLOGGED(1.3 Multijet 90 HP version) (amber)

When the ignition key is moved to MAR,the warning light turns on and should gooff after a few seconds.

The warning light turns on when the par-ticulate filter is clogged and the drivingconditions do not enable automatic acti-vation of the regeneration procedure.

To allow the regeneration procedure,keep the car running until the warning lightturns off.


h

SIDE/TAIL LIGHTSAND LOW BEAMS(green)

FOLLOW ME HOME (green)

Side/tail lights and low beams

The warning light comes on when side/taillights or low beams are turned on.

Follow me home

The warning light turns on when this de-vice is active (see “Follow me home” insection “Dashboard and controls”).


3

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (green)

The warning light comes onwhen the front fog lights areturned on.

5

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 131

132

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

LEFT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR(green - intermittent)

The warning light turns on when the di-rection indicator control lever is moveddownwards or, together with the right in-dicator, when the hazard light button ispressed.

F

RIGHT-HANDDIRECTIONINDICATOR(green - intermittent)

The warning light turns on when the di-rection indicator control lever is movedupwards or, together with the left indica-tor, when the hazard light button ispressed.

D

“DUALDRIVE”ELECTRIC POWERSTEERINGACTIVATION (symbol on display)

The “CITY” indication appears on the display when the “Dual drive” electricpower steering system is activated bypressing the relevant control button.Pressing the button again causes the“CITY” indication to go off.

CITY

CRUISE CONTROLSYSTEM (where provided) (green)

When the ignition key is movedto MAR, the warning light turns on andshould go off after a few seconds.

The warning light is lit on the display byrotating the Cruise Control to ON.


Ü

MAIN BEAMS (blue)

The warning light comes onwhen the main beams areturned on.

1

POSSIBLE ICE ON ROAD

When the external temperature reachesor drops below 3°C, and ice may be pre-sent on the road, the display shows thesymbol ❄, a warning message appears andthe temperature value flashes.

LIMITED RANGE

The display shows a dedicated message toinform the driver that the car range hasdropped below 50 Km (or 30 miles), orthe fuel level is inferior to 4 litres.

123-132 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:29 Pagina 132

133

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

DOOR OPENING/CLOSING ........................................... 134

ENGINE STARTING............................................................ 134

FIX & GO automatic (QUICK TYRE REPAIR KIT) ...... 136

IF A TYRE IS PUNCTURED............................................... 140

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB ................... 144

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT......................... 147

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHT BURNS OUT.......................... 152

IF A FUSE BLOWS................................................................ 153

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT.................................................. 158

JACKING THE CAR............................................................. 158

TOWING THE CAR............................................................ 159

IIINN AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

In an emergency we recommend that you call the toll-free number found on the Warranty Booklet. You can also connect to the site www.fiat.com

to search for the nearest Fiat Dealership point.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 133

134

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

DOOROPENING/CLOSING

Emergency door locking devicefrom outside fig. 1

The doors are fitted with a device whichmakes it possible to close the doors withthe lock without power supply.

To close, proceed as follows:

❒ insert the ignition key in the pawl B

❒ turn the device to position 1 and closethe ledge.

To open, proceed as follows:

❒ insert the key in the pawl and turn itclockwise

❒ open the driver’s door

❒ from the vehicle inside open the re-maining doors by operating the leverslocated in the handles.

fig. 1 F0H0247m

ENGINE STARTING

JUMP STARTING fig. 2

If the battery is flat, it is possible to startthe engine using an auxiliary battery withthe same capacity or a little higher thanthe flat one.

Proceed as follows:

❒ Connect positive terminals (+) of thetwo batteries with a jump lead;

❒ With a second lead, connect the neg-ative terminal (–) of the auxiliary bat-tery and to an earthing point E on theengine or the gearbox of the car to bestarted;

❒ Start the engine;

❒ When the engine has been started, re-move the leads reversing the orderabove.

If after a few attempts the engine does notstart, do not insist but contact the near-est Fiat Dealership.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 134

135

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 2 F0H0718m

IMPORTANT Do not directly connect thetwo negative terminals: sparks could ignitethe flammable gas from the battery. If theother battery is fitted in a vehicle, preventaccidental contacts between the metalparts of the two vehicles.

Do not carry out this proce-dure if you lack experience;

if it is not done correctly it can causevery intense electrical discharges. Inaddition, the fluid contained in thebattery is poisonous and corrosive.Avoid contact with skin and eyes. Youare also advised not to put nakedflames or lighted cigarettes near thebattery and not to cause sparks.

WARNING

Under no circumstancesshould a battery charger beused to start the engine: itcould damage the electronic

systems and in particular the ignitionand injection control units.

BUMP STARTING

Never bump start the engine (bu push-ing, towing, or coasting downhill) as thiscould cause fuel to flow into the catalyticexhaust system and damage it beyond re-pair.

IMPORTANT Remember that until theengine has started the brake booster andelectrical power steering systems will notwork and a greater effort will thereforebe required to press the brake pedal orturn the steering wheel.

Alert other drivers that thecar is stationary in compli-

ance with local regulations: hazardwarning lights, warning triangle etc.Any passengers on board should leavethe car, especially if it is heavily laden.Passengers should stay away from on-coming traffic while the wheel is be-ing changed on. If the wheel is beingchanged on a steep or badly surfacedroad, place the wedges or other suit-able material under the wheel to stopthe car.

WARNING

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 135

136

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FIX & GO automatic(QUICK TYRE REPAIRKIT) (where provided)

The quick tyre repair kit Fix & Go auto-matic is placed in the boot.

The kit includes:

❒ bottle A-fig. 3 containing sealer and fit-ted with:

– filling pipe B;

– sticker C bearing the notice “max.80 km/h”, to be placed in a positionvisible to the driver (on the instru-ment panel) after fixing the tyre;

❒ instruction brochure fig. 4, to be usedfor prompt and proper use of the quickrepair kit and to be then handed to thepersonnel charged with handling thetreated tyre;

❒ compressor D including gauge and con-nections;

❒ a pair of protection gloves located inthe side space of the compressor;

❒ adapters for inflating different elements.

In the kit container (placed in the boot un-der the carpet) are also housed the screw-driver and the tow hitch.

IMPORTANT Do not use the quick re-pairing kit if the tyre is damaged due todriving with the wheel flattened.

fig. 3 F0H0354m fig. 4 F0H0355m

Hand the instructionbrochure to the personnel

charged with treating the tyre re-paired with the kit.

WARNING

IT SHOULD BE NOTICED THAT:

The sealing fluid of the quick tyre repairkit is effective with external temperaturesbetween –20 °C and +50 °C.

The sealing fluid has limited life.

In the event of a puncturecaused by foreign bodies, it ispossible to repair tyres show-ing damages on the track or

shoulder up to max 4 mm diameter.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 136

137

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Holes and damages on thetyre side walls cannot be re-

paired. Do not use the quick tyre re-pair kit if damaging is due to runningwith flat tyre.

WARNING

Repairs are not possible incase of damages on the

wheel rim (bad groove distortioncausing air loss). Do not remove for-eign bodies (screws or nails) from thetyre.

WARNING

The compressor shall not beoperated for more than 20

minutes. Risk of overheating!. Tyresrepaired with the quick tyre repair kitshall be used temporarily only.

WARNING

INFLATING PROCEDURE

❒ Pull up the handbrake. Loosen tyreinflation valve cap, take out the fillerhose A-fig. 5 and screw the ring nutB on the tyre valve;

fig. 5 F0H0747m

The cylinder contains ethyl-ene glycol. The cylinder con-

tains latex: it can cause allergic re-actions. It is harmful if ingested or in-haled and irritant for the eyes and incase of contact. In case of contactrinse immediately with water andtake off contaminated clothes. Ifswallowed, do not induce vomit, rinseout the mouth, drink a lot of waterand call the doctor immediately.Keep away from children. This prod-uct must not be used by asthmatics.Do not inhale vapours. Call the doc-tor immediately in case of allergic re-actions. Keep the cylinder in thespace provided for the purpose andfar from heat. The sealing fluid haslimited life.

WARNING

Replace the cylinder if sealerhas run out. Do not throwaway the cylinder and thesealing fluid. Have the sealing

fluid and the cylinder disposed of incompliance with national and localregulations.

Put on the protection glovesprovided together with quick

tyre repair kit.

WARNING

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 137

138

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY


❒ make sure the compressor switch D-fig. 6 is set to 0 (off), start the engineand fit plug A-fig. 7 into the nearestcurrent outlet and then turn on thecompressor by setting switch D to I(on). Inflate the tyre to the pressurespecified in paragraph “Inflation pres-sure” in section “Technical Specifica-tions”. Check tyre pressure on gauge Fwith compressor off to obtain precisereading;

❒ if after 5 minutes it is still impossibleto reach at least 1.5 bar, disengage com-pressor from valve and current outlet,then move the car forth for approx. tenmetres in order to distribute the seal-ing fluid inside the tyre evenly, then re-peat the inflation operation;

❒ If after this operation it is still impossi-ble after 5 minutes to reach at least 1.8bar, do not start driving since the tyreis excessively damaged and the quicktyre repair kit cannot guarantee suit-able sealing, contact Fiat Dealership;

❒ if reaching the tyre pressure specifiedin paragraph “Inflation pressure” in sec-tion “Technical Specifications”, startdriving immediately;

Apply the sticker in a visibleposition for the driver to in-

dicate that the tyre has been treat-ed with the quick tyre repair kit. Dri-ve carefully especially when corner-ing. Do not exceed 80 km/h. Avoidheavy braking and accelerating.

WARNINGIf the pressure falls below 1.8bars, do not drive any fur-

ther: the quick tyre repair kit Fix & Goautomatic cannot guarantee properhold because the tyre is too muchdamaged. Contact Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

❒ after driving for about 10 minutes stopand check again the tyre pressure; pullup the handbrake;

❒ if at least 1.8 bar pressure is read, re-store proper pressure (with enginerunning and handbrake on) and restart;

❒ drive with the utmost care to the near-est Fiat Dealership.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 138

139

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 9 F0H0749m

FOR CHECKING ANDRESTORING PRESSURE ONLY

The compressor can be also used just forrestoring pressure. Disconnect the quickconnection and connect it directly to thetyre valve; in this way the cylinder is notconnected to compressor and the seal-ing fluid will not flow into the tyre.

fig. 10 F0H0360m

CYLINDER REPLACEMENTPROCEDURE

To replace the cylinder proceed as fol-lows:

❒ disconnect connection A-fig. 10;

❒ turn counter-clockwise the cylinder toreplace and raise it;

❒ fit the new cylinder and turn it clock-wise;

❒ connect connection A to the cylinderand fit the transparent tube B into theproper space.

It is of vital importance tocommunicate that the tyre

has been repaired using the quick tyrerepair kit. Hand the instructionbrochure to the personnel chargedwith treating the tyre repaired withthe kit.

WARNING

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 139

140

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF A TYRE ISPUNCTURED

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

Wheel changing and correct use of thejack and space-saver spare wheel call forsome precautions as listed below.

WARNING If the car is equipped with“Kit for tyre quick repair Fix & Go”, seethe instructions contained in the follow-ing chapter.

The space-saver spare wheelis specific to the vehicle: do

not use it on other models and do notuse spare wheels designed for othermodels on your car. The space-saverspare wheel must only be used in theevent of an emergency, and then on-ly for as little as possible and at nomore than 80 km/h. The space-saverspare wheel is fitted with an orangesticker giving the main instructions forits use and limitations. The stickermust never be removed or covered.Do not fit the hub cap to the sparewheel. The sticker gives the followinginformation in four languages: CAU-TION! FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY! 80KM/H MAX! REPLACE BY NORMAL WHEEL

AS SOON AS POSSIBLE. DO NOT COVER THIS

LABEL IN USE.

WARNING

When driving with a space-saver spare wheel fitted, the

driving performance of your car maychange. Avoid accelerating or brak-ing suddenly, steering abruptly or fastcornering. The lifespan of a space-saver spare wheel is approximately3000 km, after which it will need tobe replaced with another spare wheelof the same type. Never fit a standardtyre on the space-saver spare wheelrim. Have the wheel replaced and re-fitted as soon as possible. Never usetwo or more spare wheels at the sametime. Do not lubricate the boltthreads before fitting them back: theycould come loose.

WARNING

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 140

141

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

The jack should only be usedto change a wheel on the car

for which it was designed. It shouldnot be put to other uses or employedto raise other models of cars. Underno circumstances should it be usedwhen carrying out repairs under thecar. An incorrectly positioned jackmay cause the car to fall. Do not usethe jack to lift loads exceeding thatindicated on the label attached to thejack itself. Do not fit snow chains ona space-saver spare wheel. If a frontwheel (drive wheel) is punctured andyou require snow chains to proceed,take a standard wheel from the rearaxle and fit the space-saver sparewheel in its place. Having fitted twostandard wheels on the front driveaxle you can use snow chains, thussolving the emergency situation.

WARNING

Fasten the wheel cap cor-rectly to prevent the wheel

from coming free in motion. Nevertamper with the inflation valve. Nev-er place tools between the rim andtyre. Check the tyre and space-saverspare wheel pressure regularly. Thetyre inflation pressure is shown in the“Technical specifications” chapter.

WARNING Please note:

❒ the jack cannot be repaired. If it breaksit must be replaced with a new jack;

❒ no tool other than its cranking devicemay be fitted on the jack.

To change a wheel proceed as follows:

❒ Stop the car in a position that is notdangerous for oncoming traffic whereyou can change the wheel safely. Theground should be flat and adequatelyfirm;

❒ Turn the engine off and pull up thehandbrake;

❒ Engage first gear or reverse;

❒ Lift the luggage compartment panelmat;

❒ Loosen the fastener A-fig. 11;

❒ Take the tool bag B and go to thewheel to be replaced;

❒ Take the space-saver spare wheel C;

❒ If the car is fitted with alloy rims, re-move the wheel hub with the screw-driver provided levering in the grooveE-fig. 12, as shown in the figure;

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 141

142

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ Loosen the bolts on the wheel to bereplaced by about one turn with thewrench provided E-fig. 12; if the caris fitted with alloy rims, shake the carto facilitate removing this rim from thewheel hub;

❒ Operate the device F-fig. 12 and ex-tend the jack until groove G on thejack fits correctly into ridge H on thebody near sign I (at about 60 cm fromthe front wheel centre or 80 cm fromthe rear wheel centre);

fig. 12 F0H0750m

❒ Warn anybody nearby that the car isabout to be lifted. They must stay clearand not touch the vehicle until it isback on the ground;

❒ Fit the handle L-fig. 14 to operate thejack and lift the car until the wheel tobe changed is several centimetres offthe ground;

❒ For versions with wheel cap, removethe wheel cap after unloosing thethree fastening bolts and finally un-loose the fourth bolt and extract thewheel.

❒ Make sure the contact surfaces be-tween spare wheel and hub are cleanso that the fastening bolts will notcome loose;

fig. 13 F0H0751m

❒ Fit the spare wheel making the holesM-fig. 15 coincide with the respectivecentring pins N;

❒ Using the wrench provided, fully tight-en the four fastening bolts;

❒ Turn the jack handle L-fig. 14 to low-er the car and remove the jack;

❒ Use the wrench provided to fasten thebolts completely in a criss-cross fash-ion as shown in the figure.

fig. 11 F0H0161m

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 142

143

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 14 F0H0164m

fig. 15 F0H0165m

fig. 16 F0H0166m

REFITTING THE STANDARDWHEEL

Following the procedure described previ-ously, raise the car and remove the sparewheel.

For versions with steel rim

Proceed as follows:

❒ Make sure the contact surfaces be-tween standard wheel and hub areclean so that the fastening bolts willnot come loose;

❒ Fit the standard wheel by inserting thefirst bolt in the hole closest to the in-flation valve;

❒ Fit the wheel cap making the groove(on the wheel cap) coincide with theinflation valve and fit the other threebolts;

❒ Using the wrench provided, tightenthe fastening bolts;

❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ Using the wrench provided, fullytighten the bolts in the sequenceshown previously for the sparewheel;

IMPORTANT Incorrect fitting may causethe wheel cap to come off when the car istravelling.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 143

144

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS

❒ When a light is not working, checkthat it has not fused before changingthe bulb. For the location of the fuses,refer to “If a fuse blows” in this chap-ter;

❒ Before replacing a bulb that does notwork, check that the contacts are notoxidised;

❒ Burnt bulbs must be replaced by oth-ers of the same type and power;

❒ Always check the height of the head-light beam after changing a bulb.

For versions with alloy rims

❒ Make sure that hub contact surfacesare clean;

❒ Refit the standard wheel fitting it onthe pins, refit the fastening bolts andtighten them using the wrench pro-vided;

❒ Lower the car and remove the jack;

❒ Using the wrench provided, tightenthe bolts in the sequence shown pre-viously for the space-saver sparewheel fig. 16;

❒ Refit the snap-fitted wheel hub cap.

When you have finished

❒ Stow the spare wheel C-fig. 11 in thespace provided in the boot;

❒ Insert the jack partially open in its con-tainer B-fig. 11 forcing it lightly toprevent it from vibrating when trav-elling;

❒ Put the tools back into their places inthe container;

❒ Stow the container complete withtools on the spare wheel and secureeverything with the clamping deviceA-fig. 11;

❒ Correctly re-position the stiff cover.

Modifications or repairs tothe electrical system carried

out incorrectly and without bearingthe features of the system in mind cancause malfunctions with the risk offire.

WARNING

Halogen bulbs contain pres-surised gas which, if broken,

may cause small fragments of glass tobe projected outwards.

WARNING

Only touch the metal partwhen handling halogen bulbs.If the transparent bulb istouched it reduces the intesi-

ty of the light emitted and can also re-duce the life of the bulb. If you touchthe bulb accidentally, rub it with acloth moistened with alcohol and leaveit to dry.

IMPORTANT The headlight inner surfacemay be lightly misted over: this is not afault but a natural fact due to low tem-perature and the level of air humidity. Itwill disappear as soon the headlights areturned on. The presence of drops insidethe headlights means water infiltration,therefore contact Fiat Dealership.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 144

145

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TYPES OF BULBS fig. 17Various types of bulbs are fitted to yourcar:

fig. 17 F0H0178m

A Glass bulbs: clipped into position.Pull to remove.

B Bayonet type bulbs: press thebulb, turn counterclockwise to re-move this type of bulb from its hold-er.

C Tubular bulbs: free them fromtheir contacts to remove.

D-E Halogen bulbs: to remove thebulb, release the clip holding thebulb in place.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 145

146

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Bulb Ref. Figure Type Power

Main beam headlights E H1 55WDipped beam headlights D H7 55WFront side lights A W5W 5WFront fog lights (where provided) E H1 55WFront direction indicators B PY21W 21WSide direction indicators A WY5W 5WRear direction indicators B PY21W 21WTaillights B P21/5W 21W/5WBrake lights B P21/5W 21W/5WThird brake light (additional brake lights) A W5W 5WReversing light B P21W 21WRear fog lights B P21W 21WNumber plate lights C C5W 5WFront ceiling light A W5W 10WRear ceiling light A W5W 10WRear ceiling lights (with sunroof) A W5W 5W Boot light A W5W 5W

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 146

147

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF AN EXTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT

For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.

FRONT LIGHT UNITS

The front light units contain the sidelights,the dipped beam, main beam, direction in-dicator and fog light bulbs.

To change the bulbs of the sidelights, lowbeams, direction indicators and fog lightsit is necessary to remove the cover A-fig. 18 releasing the catch B.

fig. 18 F0H0179m fig. 19 F0H0180m

The bulbs are arranged inside the light unitfig. 19 as follows:

G: direction indicators

F: main beam headlights

E: sidelights

D: fog lights

C: dipped beam headlights

After replacement, refit the covers cor-rectly checking that they are properly se-cured.

MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHTS

To change the bulb, proceed as follows:

❒ turn the cap A-fig. 20 anticlockwiseand remove it;

❒ disconnect the electrical connector B-fig. 21;

❒ release the bulb catch C-fig. 21;

❒ remove the bulb D-fig. 21 and changeit;

❒ refit the catch C-fig. 21, connect theelectrical connector B and fit the capA-fig. 20 turning it clockwise. Put thecap ventilation outlet H-fig. 20 fromthe top downwards.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 147

148

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 20 F0H0181m fig. 21

C

B

D

F0H0214m

fig. 22 F0H0182m

DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHTS


❒ remove the protective cover releasingthe relevant catch;

❒ disconnect the electrical connector F-fig. 22;

❒ release the bulb catch E;

❒ remove the bulb G and change it;

fig. 23 F0H0183m

DIRECTION INDICATORS

Front



❒ turn the bulb holder A-fig. 23 counter-clockwise and remove it;

❒ remove the bulb lightly pushing it andturning it counter-clockwise (“bayo-net”);

❒ replace the bulb;

❒ refit the bulb holder turning it clock-wise, checking that it is secured cor-rectly.

❒ refit the protective cover correctly

❒ fit a new bulb making the tabs of themetallic part coincide with the grooveson the reflector, then hook the bulbholder catch E and re-connect theelectrical connector F;

❒ refit the protective cover correctly.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 148

149

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Side


❒ lever in the point shown by the arrowto compress the catch and remove theunit C-fig. 24;

❒ turn the bulb holder D counter-clock-wise, remove the snap-fitted bulb andchange it;

❒ refit the bulb holder D in the trans-parent cover, then position the unitmaking sure the catch clicks into place.

fig. 24 F0H0184m

FRONT SIDELIGHTS



❒ remove the snap-fitted bulb holder A-fig. 25, extract the bulb B and changeit;

❒ refit the bulb holder A;

❒ refit the protective cover correctly.

FRONT FOG LIGHTS (where provided)


❒ disconnect the electrical connector C-fig. 26;

❒ release the bulb catch D;

❒ remove the bulb E and change it;

❒ fit the new bulb, hook the bulb catchD and re-connect the electrical con-nector C.

fig. 25 F0H0185m fig. 26 F0H0186m

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 149

150

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

fig. 27 F0H0187m fig. 28 F0H0188m

REAR LIGHT UNITS


❒ open the tailgate;

❒ turn the fastener A-fig. 27 counter-clockwise (for the left lid) or clockwise(for the right lid) and remove the cov-er;

❒ disconnect the electrical connector C-fig. 28;

❒ slacken the two fastening nuts B;

❒ to remove the headlight, pull it in per-pendicular direction using the handleon the headlight;

❒ press the bulb holder tabs and removeit from its housing;

❒ remove bulbs D - E - F - G-fig. 29lightly pushing them and turning themcounter-clockwise;

❒ refit the bulb holder and make surethe two tabs are fastened and thenconnect the electrical connector C-fig. 28; drive in the two fastening nutsB; refit the cover checking that thetabs are fitted in their seat and turningthe fastener A-fig. 27 counter-clock-wise (for the left lid) or clockwise (forthe right lid) to hook it.

In the event of a failure (burnt-out bulbs)on taillights, brake lights will switch ondimmed automatically in order to guaran-tee temporary lighting at the back of thecar.

After replacing the burnt-out bulb the tail-lights will operate regularly.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 150

151

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

The bulbs are arranged inside the light unitas follows:

D: sidelights / STOP

E: direction indicators

F: reversing light

G: rear fog lights

fig. 29 F0H0189m fig. 30 F0H0190m

ADDITIONAL BRAKING LIGHT(THIRD STOP)

To change the bulbs, proceed as follows:


❒ slacken the two fastening screws A-fig. 30;

❒ press the catch B and remove the bulbholder;

❒ remove the snap-fitted bulbs andchange them;

❒ insert the bulb holder making sure thecatch B clicks into place; drive in thetwo fastening screws A.

IMPORTANT Where provided, on ver-sions with dark windows, replace thewhole light unit since it is sealed.

Number plate light


❒ work in the point shown by the arrowand remove the transparent A-fig. 31;

❒ change the bulb B releasing it from theside contacts and making sure the newbulb is correctly fastened between thecontacts;

❒ refit the transparent.

fig. 31 F0H0192m

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 151

152

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF AN INTERIOR LIGHTBURNS OUT

For the type of bulb and power rating, see“When needing to change a bulb”.

FRONT CEILING LIGHT fig. 32-33


❒ work in the points shown by the ar-rows and remove the light unit A;

❒ open the protective cover B;

❒ change the bulbs C releasing themfrom the side contacts and makingsure the new bulbs are correctly fas-tened between the contacts;

❒ close the cover B and fasten the lightunit A in its housing making sure itclicks into place.

REAR CEILING LIGHT (where provided) fig. 34-35


❒ work in the points shown by the ar-rows and remove the light unit D;

❒ open the protective cover E;

❒ change the bulb F releasing it from theside contacts and making sure the newbulb is correctly fastened between thecontacts;

❒ close the cover E and fasten the lightunit D in its housing making sure itclicks into place.

fig. 32 F0H0193m fig. 33 F0H0194m

fig. 34 F0H0195m

BOOT LIGHT fig. 36



❒ remove the light unit A levering in thepoint shown by the arrow.

❒ open the protective cover B andchange the snap-fitted bulb;

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 152

153

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

❒ refit the protective cover B on thetransparent;

❒ refit the light unit A inserting it in itscorrect position firstly on one end andthen on the other until it clicks intoplace.

fig. 35 F0H0196m

fig. 36 F0H0197m

IF A FUSE BLOWS

GENERAL fig. 37

The fuse is a protective device for theelectric system: it comes into action (i.e.it cuts off) mainly due to a fault or im-proper action on the system.

If an electric device is not working, checkthe efficiency of its fuse. The conductor el-ement A must be intact; if not, replace thefuse with one of the same amp rating(same colour).

B: Undamaged fuse

C: Fuse with broken filament.

Remove the blown fuse using the pincerD provided in the control box on thedashboard.

fig. 37 F0H0198m

Never replace a broken fusewith anything other than anew fuse.

Never change a fuse withanother with a higher amp

rating, DANGER OF FIRE.

WARNING

If a general fuse (MEGA-FUSE, MIDI-FUSE, MAXI-

FUSE) cuts in, do not attempt any re-pair and contact Fiat Dealership. Be-fore changing a fuse, check the igni-tion key has been removed and thatall the other electric devices havebeen turned off/disabled.

WARNING

If the fuse blows again, havethe car inspected at Fiat

Dealership.

WARNING

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 153

154

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

F0H0720m

FUSE LOCATION

Fuses are grouped into two fuse boxes tobe found respectively on the left side ofthe dashboard and in the engine com-partment near the battery.

Fuse box on the dashboard

To gain access to the fuses in the controlbox on the dashboard fig. 38, remove theprotective trim A-fig. 39-40.

fig. 39 - Left-hand drive versions F0H0719m

fig. 40 - Right-hand drive versions F0H0198m

fig. 38

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 154

155

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

F0H0720mfig. 42

fig. 41 F0H0201m

Fuse box near the battery

To gain access to the fuses fig. 42 in thefusebox on the battery post, remove theprotective cover B - fig. 41.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 155

156

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

FUSE SUMMARY TABLE

Control box on dashboard USER FUSE AMPERE

Right-hand dipped beam headlight F12 7.5Left-hand dipped beam headlight / headlight aiming device F13 7.5Reversing lights / engine compartment control box relay coils / body computer F31 7.5Available F32 –Left rear power window F33 20Right rear power window F34 20+15 Cruise control, signal from switch on brake pedal for control units (*) F35 7.5+30 Presetting for trailer control unit, rear locks front locks with single door control unit (*) F36 10+15 Third brake light, instrument panel, brake lights (*) F37 7.5Boot unlocking F38 20+30 EOBD diagnostic socket, sound system, navigator, tyre pressure control unit (*) F39 10Rear heated screen F40 30Heated door electric mirrors F41 7.5+15 ABS / ESP control unit (*) F42 7.5Windscreen wiper/washer F43 30Cigar lighter / current socket on tunnel F44 15Heated seats F45 15Boot current socket F46 15Driver’s door control unit power supply (power window, lock) F47 20Passenger’s door control unit power supply (power window, lock) F48 20+15 utilities (left and central dashboard control lights, electric mirrors, heated seat control lighting, presetting for radiotelephone, navigator, rain / daylight sensors, parking sensor control unit, sunroof control lighting) (*) F49 7.5Airbag control unit F50 7.5+15 Tyre pressure control unit, ECO / Sport control (*) F51 7.5Rear screen wiper/washer F52 15+30 Direction indicators, hazard lights, instrument panel (*) F53 7.5

(*) +30 = battery directive positive terminal (not under key)+15 = positive terminal under key

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 156

157

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

Fuse box in engine compartmentUSER FUSE AMPERE

Headlight washer fluid F9 20

Horn F10 15

Electronic injection secondary services F11 15

Right main beam headlight F14 7.5

Left main beam headlight F15 7.5

Electronic injection primary services F17 10

+30 Engine control unit / Radiator electric fan remote control switch (1.9 Multijet) (*) F18 10

Compressor F19 7.5

Free F20 –

Fuel pump F21 15

Electronic injection primary services (1.2 16V, 1.4 16V) F22 15

Electronic injection primary services (Multijet engine) F22 20

Electronic injection primary services (petrol engine) F22 15

+30 Dualogic gearbox (*) F23 30

+15 Electric power steering (*) F24 7,5

Front fog lights F30 15


Optional fusebox (on auxiliary bracket)USER FUSE AMPERE

+30 Outside radio amplifier (*) F54 15

+30 Sunroof (*) F58 20


133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 157

158

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

IF THE BATTERY IS FLAT

WARNING The battery charging proce-dure is described only for information pur-poses. This operation should be carriedout by Fiat Dealership.

Charging should be slow at low amp rat-ing for 24 hours. Charging for a longertime may damage the battery.

Charge the battery as follows:

❒ disconnect battery negative terminal;

❒ connect the charger cables to the bat-tery terminals, observing the poles;

❒ turn on the charger;

❒ when you have finished, turn thecharger off before disconnecting thebattery;

❒ reconnect battery negative terminal.

WARNING If the vehicle is fitted withalarm system, turn it off with the remotecontrol (see “Alarm” in the “Dashboardand controls” chapter).

JACKING THE CAR

If the car is to be lifted, go to a Fiat Deal-ership which is equipped with the armhoist or workshop lift.

Jack up the car only by positioning the jackarms or the shop jack in the points shownin the figures fig. 43.

The liquid in the battery ispoisonous and corrosive. Do

not let it touch the skin or eyes.Recharging the battery should bedone in a well ventilated area awayfrom naked flames or possible sourcesof sparks: explosion and fire risk.

WARNING

Do not attempt to rechargea frozen battery. Thaw it

first, otherwise it could explode. If thebattery froze, make sure the internalelements are not broken (short-circuitrisk) and that the casing is notcracked (risk of spilling the poisonousand corrosive fluid).

WARNING

fig. 43 F0H0752m

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 158

159

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TOWING THE CAR

The car is delivered with two tow rings:the short tow ring shall be fitted at thefront and the long one at the back.

Side figures show how rear (long) ring wasarranged, within spare wheel fig. 44 andin the container of kit Fix & Go automat-ic, respectively fig. 45.

HOW TO REMOVE TOW HITCHCAPS

To avoid damaging the cap A-fig. 46, pro-ceed as follows:

❒ take the screwdriver provided in thetool kit;

fig. 46 F0H0250m

fig. 47 F0H0251m

❒ insert the screwdriver in the cap slotB;

❒ put the hand thumb on the cap to pre-vent damaging it fig. 47;

fig. 44 F0H0342m

fig. 45 F0H0361m

❒ remove the cap (without turning it)making a movement perpendicular tothe supporting surface fig. 47.

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 159

160

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

TOW RING HOOKING

Proceed as follows:

❒ take the tow ring B from its support;

❒ tighten the ring on the rear fig. 48 orfront threaded pin fig. 49.

fig. 48 F0H0204m fig. 49 F0H0205m

Before starting to tow, turnthe ignition key to MAR and

then to STOP. Do not remove thekey. If the key is removed, the steer-ing lock engages automatically whichprevents the wheels being turned.

WARNING

While the car is being towedwith the engine off, remem-

ber that the brake pedal and steeringwill require more effort as you nolonger have the benefit of the brakebooster and the electrical powersteering. Do not use flexible cables totow. Avoid jerking. Whilst towing, en-sure that the coupling to the car doesnot damage the surrounding compo-nents. When towing the car, you mustcomply with the specific traffic reg-ulations regarding the tow hitch andhow to tow on the road.

WARNING

Do not start the enginewhen towing the car.

WARNING

133-160 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 160

161

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING.................................................. 162SERVICE SCHEDULE ........................................................... 163ANNUAL INSPECTION SCHEDULE.............................. 165ADDITIONAL CHECKS..................................................... 165CHECKING FLUID LEVELS ............................................... 167DIESEL FUEL FILTER (green filter) ................................... 173BATTERY................................................................................ 173WHEELS AND TYRES......................................................... 175RUBBER HOSES.................................................................... 176WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOW WIPERS .................. 176BODYWORK ........................................................................ 178INTERIORS............................................................................. 180

CCCAARR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 161

162

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Correct maintenance is essential for en-suring long car life under the best condi-tions.

This is why Fiat has programmed a seriesof checks and maintenance operationsevery 20,000 km.

It is however important to remember thatscheduled servicing does not completelycover all the car’s requirements: also inthe initial period before 20,000 km servicecoupon and later, between one couponand another, ordinary care is still requiredsuch as for example routine check andtopping up the level of fluids, tyre pressurecheck, etc...

IMPORTANT The Programmed Mainte-nance coupons are specified by the Man-ufacturer. The failure to have them car-ried out may invalidate the warranty.

Scheduled Servicing is performed by all Fi-at Dealership, at pre-established times.

If during each operation, in addition to theones programmed, the need arises for fur-ther replacements or repairs, these maybe carried out only with the explicit agree-ment of the Customer.

IMPORTANT You are advised to contactFiat Dealership in the event of any minoroperating faults, without waiting for thenext service coupon.

If your car is used frequently for towing,the interval between one service couponand the other must be reduced.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 162

163

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

SERVICE SCHEDULE

Thousands of km

Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if required

Check light system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights, boot lights,passenger compartment lights, dashboard warning lights, etc.)

Check windscreen/washer(nozzles/and blade position regulation)

Check front disc brake pad condition and wear and operation of brake pad wear indicator.

Check rear drum brake lining conditions and wear

Check rear (where provided) disk brake pad conditions and wear

Sight inspect the conditions of: body external parts, underbodyprotection pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel, brakes), rubber parts (boots, sleeves, bushes, etc.)

Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication

Check tension and adjust accessory drive belts (excluding engines with automatic belt tighteners)

Check tension and adjust accessory drive belts

Check and adjust tappet clearance (1.4 8V versions)

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ● ●

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 163

164

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

Thousands of kmCheck and adjust handbrake lever strokeCheck exhaust emissions/smoke (Multijet versions)Check exhaust emissions (petrol versions)Change fuel filter cartridge (Multijet versions)Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol versions)Change air cleaner cartridge (Multijet versions) (❏)Top up fluids (engine coolant, brakes, windscreen washer, battery, Dualogic/Dual FuNction System, etc.)Check timing belt conditions (■)Replace timing belt (*) (■)Replace timing belt (1.6 Multijet versions) (*)Replace accessory drive belt/sChange spark plugs (petrol versions)Check engine control system operation (through diagnosis socket)Change engine oil and oil filter (petrol versions)Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions with DPF) (**)Change engine oil and oil filter (Multijet versions without DPF) (▲)Change brake fluid (or every 2 years)Change pollen filter (or every year)

(*) Or every 4 years for particularly demanding use:- cold/hot climates;- driving in the city idling for a long time;- dusty roads or roads covered with sand and/or saltOr every 5 years, regardless of the km covered and conditions of use.

(**) Engine oil and oil filter shall be changed when the corresponding warning light turns on (see section “Warning lights and Messages”), or inany case every 2 years.

(❏) Every 30.000 km for 1.3 Multijet versions (■) Excluding 1.3 Multijet and 1.6 Multijet versions (▲) Every 30.000 km

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

●

●

●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 164

165

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

ANNUAL INSPECTIONSCHEDULE

For cars with an annual mileage of below20,000 km (for example about 15,000 km)the following yearly inspection programmeis provided:

❒ check tyre conditions/wear and adjustpressure if required (including thespare wheel);

❒ check lighting system operation (head-lights, direction indicators, hazardlights, boot lights, passenger compart-ment lights, warning lights, etc.);

❒ check windscreen/washer (nozzles/and blade position regulation)

❒ check front disk brake pad conditionsand wear;

❒ sight inspect the conditions of: engine,gearbox, transmission, pipes and hoses(exhaust - fuel - brakes), rubber parts(boots, sleeves, bushes, etc;

❒ check for bonnet and boot lock clean-ness, lever cleanness and lubrication;

❒ check battery charge;

❒ visual check on various drive belt con-ditions;

❒ top up fluid levels (engine coolant,brakes, windscreen washer, battery,etc.);

❒ change engine oil;

❒ change engine oil filter;

❒ replace pollen filter (where provided).

ADDITIONAL CHECKS

Every 1,000 km or before long journeys,check and top up if required:

❒ engine coolant fluid level;

❒ brake fluid level;

❒ windscreen washer fluid level;

❒ tyre pressure and conditions.

Every 3,000 km check and top up if re-quired: engine oil level.

You are recommended to use FL Seleniaproducts, designed and produced specifi-cally for Fiat cars (see table “Capacities”in section “Technical specifications”).

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 165

166

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT - Engine oil

Should prevailing use of the car be underone of the following specially heavy con-ditions:

❒ trailer or caravan towing;

❒ dusty roads;

❒ short distances (less than 7-8 km) re-peated and with external tempera-tures below zero;

❒ frequently idling engines or long dis-tance low speed driving (e.g. taxis ordoor-to-door deliveries) or in case ofa long term inactivity;

replace engine oil more frequently thanrequired on “Service schedule”.

IMPORTANT - Air cleaner

If the car is used on dusty roads changethe air cleaner more frequently than theindications in the “Service schedule”.

If in doubt as to how often the engine oiland air cleaner should be changed ac-cording to how you use the car, contacta Fiat Dealership.

IMPORTANT - Pollen filter

If the vehicle is used frequently in dusty orheavily polluted environments it is advis-able to replace the filtering element morefrequently; in particular it should be re-placed if a reduction of the amount of airadmitted to the passenger compartmentis noted.

IMPORTANT - Diesel filter

The possibility of topping up with dieselfuel not complying with EN590 EuropeanNorm might make it necessary to replacethe filter more frequently than indicatedin the “Service schedule”.

IMPORTANT - Battery

The charge in the battery should bechecked at the start of winter to limit therisk of electrolyte freezing.

This check should be carried out morefrequently if the car is used mainly forshort trips, or if it is fitted with accessoriesthat permanently absorb electricity evenwith the ignition key removed, especiallyin the case of after market accessories. Ifthe car is used in hot climates or particu-larly harsh conditions it is wise to checkthe level of the battery fluid (electrolyte)more frequently than specified in the “Ser-vice schedule” in this section.

Car maintenance should beentrusted to Fiat Dealership.For routine and minor main-tenance operations you wish

to carry out yourself, always make sureyou have the proper equipment, gen-uine Fiat spare parts and the necessaryfluids; do not however carry out theseoperations if you have no experience.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 166

167

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

CHECKING FLUID LEVELS

IMPORTANT When topping up take carenot to confuse the various types of fluids:they are all incompatible with one anoth-er and could seriously damage the car.

IMPORTANT Never smoke while work-ing in the engine compartment: gas and in-flammable vapours may be present, withthe risk of fire.

F0H0721mfig. 1 - 1.2 16V and 1.4 16V versions

F0H0722mfig. 2 - 1.4 8V versions (where provided)

1 Engine coolant2 Engine oil 3 Brake fluid4 Battery 5 Windscreen/rear window/headlight

washer fluid

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 167

168

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

F0H0723mfig. 3 - 1.3 Multijet versions

3

1 2

4 5

F0H0763mfig. 4 - 1.6 Multijet versions

1 Engine coolant2 Engine oil3 Brake fluid 4 Battery 5 Windscreen/rear window/headlight

washer fluid

1 Engine oil2 Battery3 Brake fluid4 Windscreen/rear window/headlight

washer fluid5 Engine coolant

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 168

169

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

ENGINE OIL fig. 5-6-7-8

Checking engine oil

Check the oil level a few minutes (about5) after the engine has stopped, with thecar parked on level ground.

Check that the level is within the MIN andMAX marks on the dipstick. The intervalbetween the MIN and MAX marks cor-responds to about one litre of oil.

Topping up engine oil

If the oil level is near or even below theMIN mark, add oil through the filler neck,until reaching the MAX mark. Oil levelshall never exceed the MAX mark.

IMPORTANT If a routine check revealsthat the oil level is above the MAX mark,contact Fiat Dealership to have the cor-rect level restored.

IMPORTANT After adding or changingthe oil, let the engine turn over for a fewseconds and wait a few minutes after turn-ing it off before you check the level.

Engine oil consumption

Max engine oil consumption is usually 400grams every 1000 km.

When the car is new, the engine needsto run in, therefore the engine oil con-sumption can only be considered stabilisedafter the first 5000 - 6000 km.

fig. 5 - 1.2 16V - 1.4 16V versions F0H0754m fig. 6 - 1.4 8V versions (where provided)

F0H0258m fig. 7 - 1.3 Multijet versions F0H0180m

fig. 8 - 1.6 Multijet versions F0H0764m

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 169

170

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT The oil consumption de-pends on driving style and the conditionsunder which the car is used.

IMPORTANT Do not add oil with speci-fications other than that already in the en-gine.

When the engine is hot, takecare when working inside the

engine compartment to avoid burns.Remember that when the engine ishot, the fan may cut in: danger of in-jury. Scarves, ties and other looseclothing might be pulled by movingparts.

WARNING

Used engine oil and filter con-tain harmful substances forthe environment. Contact Fi-at Dealership to have the oil

and filter changed.

ENGINE COOLANT FLUID fig. 9-10

The coolant level shall be checked withcold engine and shall be included betweenthe MIN and MAX mark on the reser-voir.

If the level is low, pour slowly a mixtureof 50% distilled water and 50% FL SeleniaPARAFLU UP through the filler neck.

A 50-50 mixture of PARAFLU UP anddistilled water gives freeze protection to–35°C.

When the vehicle is used under particu-larly harsh climate conditions, we recom-mend using a 60-40 mixture ofPARAFLU UP and demineralised water.

IMPORTANT Do not remove the reser-voir cap when the engine is hot: you riskscalding yourself.

fig. 9 - 1.2 16V, 1.4 8V (where provided), 1.4 16V versions

F0H0210m

fig. 10 - 1.3 Multijet and 1.6 Multijet versions

F0H0211m

The cooling system is pres-surised. If necessary, replace

the cap only with another genuineone, otherwise system efficiencycould be compromised.

WARNING

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 170

171

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

The cooling system usesPARAFLU UP antifreeze. Do

not add fluid having different speci-fications from that already existing.PARAFLU UP cannot be mixed withother types of fluids. Should other flu-ids be added, do not start the engineand contact Fiat Dealership as soonas possible.

WARNING

fig. 11 F0H0212m

WINDSCREEN/REARWINDOW/HEADLIGHTWASHER FLUID

To top up, remove the cap A-fig. 11 andthen pour a mixture of water andTUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35, inthe following concentrations:

❒ 30% TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 70% water in summer;

❒ 50% TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35 and 50% water in winter.

In case of temperatures below –20°C, useundiluted TUTELA PROFESSIONALSC 35.

Check level through the reservoir.

Do not travel with the wind-screen washer reservoir emp-

ty: the windscreen washer is funda-mental for improving visibility.

WARNING

Certain commercial addi-tives for windscreen washers

are inflammable. The engine com-partment contains hot componentswhich may set it on fire.

WARNING

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 171

172

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

BRAKE FLUID fig. 12

Unscrew cap: check that the fluid level inthe reservoir is at maximum.

Fluid level in the reservoir shall not exceedthe MAX mark.

If fluid has to be added, it is suggested touse the brake fluid in table “Fluids and lu-bricants” (see chapter “Technical charac-teristics”).

NOTE Clean accurately the tank cap andthe surrounding surface.

At plug opening, pay maximum attentionin order to prevent any impurities fromentering the tank.

For topping up, always use a funnel withintegrated filter with mesh equal to orlower than 0.12 mm.

IMPORTANT Brake fluid absorbs mois-ture, for this reason, if the vehicle is main-ly used in areas with a high degree of at-mospheric humidity, the fluid should bereplaced at more frequent intervals thanspecified in the “Service schedule”.

fig. 12 F0H0213m

Brake fluid is poisonous andhighly corrosive. In the event

of accidental contact, wash the partsinvolved immediately with neutralsoap and water, then rinse thor-oughly. Call the doctor immediatelyif the fluid is swallowed.

WARNING

Symbol π on the containerindicates synthetic brake flu-

id, distinguishing it from the mineralkind. Using mineral fluids irreversiblydamages the special braking systemrubber seals.

WARNINGMake sure that the highlycorrosive brake fluid does notdrip onto the paintwork. If itdoes, wash it off immediate-

ly with water.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 172

173

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

DIESEL FUEL FILTER (“green filter”)

DRAINING THE CONDENSE(diesel versions)

The presence of water in thefuel circuit may cause seri-

ous damage to the entire injectionsystem and cause irregular engine op-eration. If the warning light c turnson (or on certain versions, a dedicat-ed message is shown on the reconfig-urable multifunction display) contacta Fiat Dealership as soon as possibleto have the bleeding operation car-ried out. Should the above indicationstake place after refuelling, water hasprobably been poured into the tank:turn the engine off immediately andcontact a Fiat Dealership.

WARNING

BATTERY

The battery is of the “Limited mainte-nance” type: under normal conditions ofuse the electrolyte does not need toppingup with distilled water.

INSPECTING THE CHARGEAND THE ELECTROLYTE LEVEL

Inspection operations must be carried outby specialised personnel, following theprescriptions contained in the OwnerHandbook.

Any top-up operations must be carriedout exclusively by specialised personneland by the Fiat Dealership.

Battery liquid is poisonousand corrosive. Avoid contact

with the skin and eyes. Keep nakedflames or possible sources of sparksaway from the battery: risk of explo-sion or fire.

WARNING

CHANGING THE BATTERY

If required, replace the battery with a gen-uine spare part having the same specifi-cations.

If a battery with different specifications isfitted, the service intervals given in the“Service schedule” in this section will nolonger be valid.

Refer therefore to the instructions pro-vided by the battery manufacturer.

Using the battery when thefluid is too low can damage

it irreparably and generate a risk ofexplosion.

WARNING

Incorrect assembly of electricand electronic devices maycause severe damage to yourcar. Go to a Fiat Dealership if

you want to install accessories (alarms,mobile phone, etc.): they will suggestthe most suitable devices and adviseyou if a higher capacity battery needsto be installed.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 173

174

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT If the charge level remainsfor a long time under 50%, the battery isdamaged by sulphation, reducing its ca-pacity and starting attitude.

The battery will also be more at risk offreezing (e.g. already at –10°C).

Refer to the paragraph “Car inactivity” in“Starting and driving” if the car is leftparked for a long time.

If after buying the car, you want to installelectric accessories which require per-manent electric supply (alarm, etc.) con-tact the Fiat Dealership whose qualifiedpersonnel, in addition to suggesting themost suitable devices beloning to the Fi-at Lineaccessori line, will evaluate theoverall electric absorption, checkingwhether the car’s electric system is capa-ble of withstanding the load required, orwhether it should be integrated with amore powerful battery.

Since these devices continue absorbing en-ergy even when the ignition key is off, theygradually run down the battery.

USEFUL ADVICE FORLENGTHENING THE LIFE OFYOUR BATTERY

To avoid draining your battery and tolengthen its life, observe the following in-dications:

❒ when you park your car, ensure thatdoors, bonnet and flaps are wellclosed in order to ensure that no lightsremain on inside the passenger com-partment;

❒ switch off all lights inside the car: thecar is however equipped with a systemwhich switches all internal lights off au-tomatically;

❒ when the engine is off, do not keep de-vices running for long periods (e.g.sound system, hazard lights etc.);

❒ before performing any operation onthe electrical system, disconnect thebattery negative terminal cable;

❒ screw the terminals of the batterydown hard.

Batteries contain substancesthat can be very dangerous forthe environment. t is advisableto have the battery changed

by a Fiat Dealership where it will bedisposed of according to the law.

If the vehicle must remainunused for a long time at

very low temperatures, remove thebattery and carry it to a warm place,to avoid freezing.

WARNING

When performing any oper-ations on the battery or near

it, always protect your eyes with thespecial goggles.

WARNING

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 174

175

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

WHEELS AND TYRES

Check the pressure of each tyre, includ-ing the spare, every two weeks and beforelong journeys. The pressure should bechecked with the tyre rested and cold.

For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see“Wheels” in “Technical specifications”section.

Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyrewear fig. 13:

A: normal pressure: tread evenly worn.

B: low pressure: tread particularly wornat the edges.

C: high pressure: tread particularly wornin the centre.

Tyres must be replaced when the treadwears down to 1.6 mm. In any case, com-ply with the laws in the country where thecar is being driven.

IMPORTANT NOTES

❒ As far as possible, avoid sharp brak-ing and screech starts, etc. Be carefulnot to hit the kerb, potholes or oth-er obstacles hard. Driving for longstretches over bumpy roads can dam-age the tyres.

❒ Periodically check that the tyres haveno cuts in the side wall, abnormalswelling or irregular tyre wear. If anyof these occur, have the car seen to ata Fiat Dealership.

❒ Avoid overloading the vehicle whentravelling: this may cause serious dam-age to the wheels and tyres.

❒ If a tyre is punctured, stop immediatelyand change it to avoid damage to thetyre, the rim, suspensions and steer-ing system.

❒ Tyres age even if they are not usedmuch. Cracks in the tread rubber area sign of ageing. In any case, if the tyreshave been on the car for over 6 years,they should be checked by specialisedpersonnel, to see if they can still beused. Also remember to check thespare wheel.

fig. 13 F0H0216m

Remember that road holdingdepends also on the correct

tyre inflating pressure.

If the pressure is too low the tyreoverheats and this can cause it seri-ous damage.

WARNING

Do not cross switch thetyres, moving them from the

right of the car to the left and viceversa.

Never submit alloy rims to repaintingtreatments requiring to use tempera-tures exceeding 150°C since the me-chanical properties of the wheelscould be impaired.

WARNING

❒ In the case of replacement, always fitnew tyres, avoiding those of dubiousorigin;

❒ If a tyre is changed, also change the in-flation valve;

❒ To allow even wear between the frontand rear tyres, it is advisable to changethem over every 10-15 thousand kilo-metres, keeping them on the sameside of the car so as to not reverse thedirection of rotation.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 175

176

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

RUBBER HOSES

As far as the brake system and fuel rubberhoses are concerned, carefully follow the“Service schedule” in this section.

Indeed ozone, high temperatures and pro-longed lack of fluid in the system maycause hardening and cracking of the hoses,with possible leaks. Careful control istherefore necessary.

WINDSCREEN/REAR WINDOWWIPERS

BLADES

Periodically clean the rubber part usingspecial products; TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35 is recommended.

If the rubber blades are bent or worn theyshould be replaced. In any case theyshould be changed once a year.

A few simple notions can reduce the pos-sibility of damage to the blades:

❒ if the temperature fall below zero,make sure that ice has not frozen therubber against glass. If necessary, thawusing an antifreeze product;

❒ remove any snow from the glass: in ad-dition to protecting the blades, thisprevents effort on the motor andoverheating;

❒ do not operate the windscreen andrear window wipers on dry glass.

Driving with worn wiperblades is a serious hazard,

because visibility is reduced in badweather.

WARNING

Changing the windscreen wiperblades fig. 14

Proceed as follows:

❒ raise the windscreen wiper arm A andposition the blade so that it forms anangle of 90° with the arm;

❒ press tab B of the coupling spring andremove the blade to be replaced fromthe arm A;

❒ fit the new blade by inserting the tabinto the special slot in the arm. Makesure it is properly locked into place.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 176

177

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

fig. 14 F0H0217m fig. 15 F0H0218m

Changing the rear window bladefig. 15

Proceed as follows:

❒ raise the cover A and remove the armfrom the car, slackening the nut B thatfastens it to the pivot pin;

❒ fit the new arm, positioning it cor-rectly, and fully tighten the nut;

❒ lower the cover.

SPRAY NOZZLES

Windscreen wiper fig. 16

If the jet of fluid is inadequate, firstly checkthat there is fluid in the reservoir: see“Checking fluid levels” in this section).

Then check that the nozzle holes are notclogged, if necessary use a needle.

Windscreen nozzles are fluid-dynamic anddo not require adjustment; windscreen flu-id is atomized to cover a preset glass area.

fig. 16 F0H0219m

fig. 17 F0H0220m

Rear window wiper fig. 17

The rear window nozzle like the wind-screen nozzle is fluid-dynamic and do notrequire adjustment; rear window fluid isatomized to cover a preset glass area.

The nozzle holder is located at the top ofthe tailgate.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 177

178

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

BODYWORK

PROTECTION FROMATMOSPHERIC AGENTS

The main causes of corrosion are the fol-lowing:

❒ atmospheric pollution;

❒ salty air and humidity (coastal areas,or hot humid climates);

❒ seasonal environment conditions.

Not to be underestimated is also the abra-sive action of wind-borne atmosphericdust and sand and mud and gravel raisedby other vehicles.

On your Fiat Idea, Fiat implemented thebest manufacturing technologies to effec-tively protect the bodywork against cor-rosion.

These include:

❒ Painting products and systems whichgive the car particular resistance tocorrosion and abrasion;

❒ Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steelsheets, with high resistance to corro-sion;

❒ Spraying of plastic parts, with a pro-tective function, in the more exposedpoints: underdoor, inner fender parts,edges, etc.;

❒ Use of “open” boxed sections to pre-vent condensation and pockets ofmoisture from triggering rust inside.

BODY AND UNDERBODY WARRANTY

Your Fiat Idea is covered by warrantyagainst perforation due to rust of any orig-inal element of the structure or body. Forthe general terms of this warranty, referto “FIAT WARRANTY” booklet.

ADVICE FOR PRESERVING THEBODYWORK

Paint

Paintwork does not only serve an aesteth-ic purpose, but also protects the under-lying sheet metal.

In the case of deep scrapes or scores, youare advised to have the necessary touch-ing up carried out immediately to avoidthe formation of rust. Use only originalpaint products for touching up (see “Body-work paint identification plate” in section“Technical specification”).

Normal paint maintenance consists inwashing at intervals depending on the con-ditions and environment of use. For ex-ample, in highly polluted areas, or if theroads are sprayed with salt, it is wise towash the car more frequently.

To correctly wash the car:

❒ remove the aerial from the roof toprevent damage to it if the car iswashed in an automatic system;

❒ wash the body using a low pressure jetof water;

❒ wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy so-lution over the bodywork, frequentlyrinsing with the sponge;

❒ rinse well with water and dry with ajet of air or a chamois leather.

When drying, take particular care with theless visible parts like door surrounds, bon-net and around the headlights where wa-ter may stagnate. The car should not betaken to a closed area immediately, but leftin the open so that residual water canevaporate.

Do not wash the car after it has been leftin the sun or with the bonnet hot: this mayalter the shine of the paintwork.

Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned inthe same way as the rest of the vehicle.

Where possible, do not park under trees;the resinous substance many species re-lease give the paint a dull appearance andincrease the possibility of triggering rustprocesses.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 178

179

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

ARW

ARNI

NGLIG

HTS A

NDME

SSAG

ES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

IMPORTANT Bird droppings must bewashed off immediately and thoroughly asthe acid they contain is particularly ag-gressive.

Windows

Use specific window cleaner products.Use also clean cloths to avoid scratchingthe glass or damaging the transparency.

IMPORTANT The inside of therearscreen should be wiped gently with acloth in the direction of the filaments toavoid damaging the heating device.

Front headlights

IMPORTANT When cleaning plastic lens-es of front headlights, never use aromat-ic substances (e.g. petrol) or ketones (e.g.:acetone).

Engine compartment

At the end of the winter the engine com-partment should be carefully washed,without directing the jet against electron-ic control units. Contact a specialisedworkshop to have this done.

IMPORTANT Washing should be carriedout with the engine cold and the ignitionkey at STOP. After washing make surethat the various protections (e.g.: rubbercaps and various covers) have not beendamaged or removed.

Detergents cause water pollu-tion. Therefore the car shouldbe washed in areas equippedfor collecting and purifying

the liquid used in the washing process.

Never use flammable prod-ucts like oil ether or rectified

petrol for cleaning car interiors. Elec-trostatic discharges generated by rub-bing during cleaning operations couldcause fire.

WARNING

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 179

180

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIN

DEX

DASH

BOAR

DAN

D CON

TROL

SSA

FETY

DEVI

CES

CORR

ECT U

SEOF

THE C

AR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

INTERIORS

Periodically check that water is nottrapped under the mats (due to waterdripping off shoes, umbrellas, etc.) whichcould cause oxidisation of the sheet met-al.

CLEANING SEATS AND FABRICAND VELVET PARTS

Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner to re-move dust. Velvet is cleaned better if thebrush is moistened.

Rub the seats with a sponge moistenedwith a solution of water and neutral de-tergent.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS

Remove dried on dirt with lightly moist-ened chamois leather or cloth withoutpressing too hard.

Remove liquid or grease stains with a dryabsorbent cloth without rubbing. Thenwipe with a soft cloth or chamois leatherwith water and neutral soap.

If the stain persists, use specific products,carefully following the instructions for use.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or alcohol-based products.

INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS

For routine cleaning, wipe with a clothwith water and neutral non-abrasive de-tergent. Remove grease or persistentstains with appropriate products designedto preserve the appearance of compo-nents.

IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petro-leum to clean the instrument panel or oth-er plastic parts.

Do not keep aerosol cans inthe car: they might explode.

Aerosol cans must never be exposedto a temperature above 50°C. Thetemperature inside the car exposedto the sun may go well beyond thatfigure.

WARNING

Upholstery of your car hasbeen designed to withstandwear deriving from commonuse of the car. You are how-

ever recommended to avoid strongand/or continuous scratching withclothing accessories such as metallicbuckles, studs, Velcro fastenings andthe like, since these items cause cir-cumscribed stress of the cover fabricthat could lead to yarn breaking, anddamage the cover as a consequence.

STEERING WHEEL / GEARBOXLEVER KNOB AND SEATSCOATED WITH REAL LEATHER

These components shall only be cleanedwith water and neutral soap. Never usespirit or alcohol-based products.

Before using special products for clean-ing interiors, read carefully label instruc-tions and indications to make sure theyare free from spirit and/or alcohol-basedsubstances.

If when cleaning the windscreen with spe-cial glass products, some drops fall on theleather covering of the steering wheel/gearlever knob remove them immediately andthen clean with water and neutral soap.

IMPORTANT Take the utmost care whenengaging the steering lock to preventscratching the leather covering.

161-180 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:30 Pagina 180

181

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

IDENTIFICATION DATA ................................................. 182ENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS .............. 184ENGINE ................................................................................. 185FUEL FEED/IGNITION ....................................................... 187TRANSMISSION .................................................................. 187BRAKES ................................................................................... 188SUSPENSIONS....................................................................... 188STEERING............................................................................... 188WHEELS.................................................................................. 189DIMENSIONS ........................................................................ 193PERFORMANCE ................................................................... 193WEIGHTS ............................................................................... 194CAPACITIES........................................................................... 195FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ............................................. 196FUEL CONSUMPTION....................................................... 198CO2 EMISSIONS ................................................................. 199

TTTEECCHHNNIICCAALL SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 181

182

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSIDENTIFICATION DATA

You are advised to note the identificationcodes. The identification data stamped andgiven on the plates and their position arethe following fig. 1:

1 - Model plate

2 - Chassis marking

3 - Bodywork paint identification plate

4 - Engine marking.MODEL PLATE fig. 2

The plate is to be found on the frontcrossmember of the engine compartmentand bears the following identification da-ta:

B - Homologation number.

C - Vehicle type code.

D - Chassis number.

E - Maximum vehicle weight fully loaded.

F - Maximum vehicle weight fully loadedwith trailer.

G - Maximum vehicle weight on front axle.

H - Maximum vehicle weight on rear axle.

I - Engine type.

L - Body version code.

M - Spare part code.

N - Smoke opacity index (for diesel en-gines).

fig. 14

21

3F0H0225m fig. 2 F0H0760m

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 182

183

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

HASSIS MARKING fig. 3

It is printed on the passenger compart-ment floor, near the right-hand front seat.

It can be reached by lifting the special flapin the carpeting and includes the followingdata:

❒ car model;

❒ chassis number.

fig. 3 F0H0227m

fig. 4 F0H0228m

BODYWORK PAINT IDENTIFICATION PLATE fig. 4

It is applied on front bonnet and shows fol-lowing data:

A - Paint manufacturer.

B - Colour name.

C - Fiat colour code.

D - Respray and touch up code.

ENGINE MARKING

Engine marking is stamped on the cylinderblock on passenger compartment side andincludes the model and the chassis num-ber.

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 183

184

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSENGINE CODES - BODYWORK VERSIONS

Versions

1.216V

1.48V (◊)

1.416V

1.416V 90 CV (◊)

1.3 Multijet 70 HP

1.3 Multijet 90 HP

1.6 Multijet

1.6 Multijet 115 HP (◊)

1.9 Multijet 100 HP (◊)

(◊) Engine model provided for certain versions/markets only(*) Version with DPF

Engine code

188A5000

350A1000

843A1000

192B2000

188A9000

199A3000

350A2000

350A3000

188B2000

Bodywork version code

350 AXD1A 03 (5 seats)350 AXD1A 03C (4 seats)

350 AXF1A 08 (5 seats)350 AXF1A 08B (4 seats)

350 AXA1B 07E (5 seats)350 AXA1B 07F (4 seats)

350 AXE1A 06

350 AXB1A 01N (5 seats)350 AXB1A 01P (4 seats)

350 AXG1A 09AA (5 seats)350 AXG1A 09AB (4 seats)

350 AXG1A 09AC (5 seats) (*)350 AXG1A 09AD (4 seats) (*)

350 AXH1A 11 (5 seats) (*)350 AXH1A 11B (4 seats) (*)

350 AXL1A 12 (5 seats) (*)350 AXL1A 12B (4 seats) (*)

350 AXC1A 02F (5 seats)350 AXC1A 02E (4 seats)

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 184

185

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

1.48V (◊)

350A1000

Otto

4 in line

2

72 x 84

1368

11 ± 0.2

5777

6000

11511.73000

NGK ZKR7A-10

Unleaded petrol95 RON

(EN228 Specifications)

ENGINE

GENERAL FEATURES

Engine code

Cycle

Number and layout of cylinders

Valves per cylinder

Piston bore and stroke mm

Total displacement cm3

Compression ratio

Maximum power (EEC) kWHP

corresponding ratio: rpm

Maximum torque (EEC) Nmkgm


Spark plugs

Fuel

(◊) Engine model provided for certain versions/markets only

1.216V

188A5000

Otto

4 in line

4

70.8 x 78.86

1242

10.6 ± 0.2

5980

5000

11411.64000

NGK DCPR7E-N-10BOSCH YR7DEU



1.416V

843A1000

Otto

4 in line

4

72 x 84

1368

11 ± 0.2

7095

5800

12813

4500

NGK ZKR7A-10



181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 185

186

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSGENERAL FEATURES

Engine code:

Cycle:

Number and layout of cylinders:

Valves per cylinder:

Piston bore and stroke mm:

Total displacement cm3:

Compression ratio:

Maximum power (EEC): kWHP


Maximum torque (EEC): Nmkgm


Spark plugs:

Fuel:

1.6 Multijet

350A2000

Diesel

4 in line

4

79.5 x 80.5

1598

16.5 ±1

881203500

30030.51500

–

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles


1.3 Multijet 70 HP

188A9000

Diesel

4 in line

4

69.6 x 82

1248

18 ±0.4

5170

4000

18018.31750

–



1.3 Multijet 90 HP

199A3000

Diesel

4 in line

4

69.6 x 82

1248

17.6 ±0.4

6690

4000

20020

1750

–



181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 186

187

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

TRANSMISSION

Gearbox

Clutch

Drive


1.216V - 1.48V (◊) - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Five forward gears and reverse with synchromesh for forward gear engagement

Hydraulic control, self-adjusting without travel-free pedal

Front

1.416V

Five or six forward gears and reverse with synchromesh for forward gear engagement

Hydraulic control, self-adjusting without travel-freepedal

Front

Modifications or repairs to the fuel system that are not carried out properly or do not take the system’s techni-cal specifications into account can cause malfunctions leading to the risk of fire.

FUEL FEED/IGNITION

Fuel feed


1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Direct injection with electronically controlledMultijet “Common Rail” with turbosupercharger

and intercooler

1.216V - 1.48V (◊) - 1.416V

Multipoint sequential phased electronic injection, returnless system

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 187

188

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

SUSPENSIONS

Front

Rear


1.216V - 1.48V (◊) - 1.416V - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Mc Pherson independent wheels

Interconnected wheels with twisting axle

STEERING

Type

Minimum steeringcycle m


1.216V - 1.48V (◊) - 1.416V - 1.3 Multijet - 1.6 Multijet

Rack and pinion with electric power steering

10.0

BRAKES

Service brakes:– front– rear

Parking brake

IMPORTANT Water, ice and antifreeze salt on roads may deposit on the brake discs thus reducing braking efficiency at first braking.(◊) Engine model provided for certain versions/markets only

1.216V - 1.48V (◊) - 1.416V - 1.3 Multijet 70HP

Disc, self-ventilating (257 mm x 22 mm)Drum type (203 mm x 38 mm)

Controlled by hand lever, working on rear brakes

1.3 Multijet 90HP - 1.6 Multijet

Disc, self-ventilating (284 mm x 22mm)

1.3 Multijet 90HP: drum type (228 mm x 40 mm)1.6 Multijet: disc (240 mm x 11 mm)

Controlled by hand lever, working on rear brakes

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 188

189

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

fig. 5 F0H0229m

WHEELS

RIMS AND TYRES

Pressed steel or alloy rims. Tubeless tyreswith radial carcass. The homologated tyresare listed in the Log book.

IMPORTANT In the event of discrepan-cies between the information provided onthis “Owner handbook” and the “Logbook”, consider the specifications shownin the log book only.

Attaining to the prescribed size, to ensuresafety of the car in movement, it must befitted with tyres of the same make andtype on all wheels.

IMPORTANT Do not use inner tubeswith Tubeless tyres.

UNDERSTANDING TYREMARKING

Example: 185/65 R 14 86 T

185 = Nominal width (S, distancebetween sidewalls in mm).

65 = Percentage height/width ratio(H/ S).

R = Radial tyre.14 = Rim diameter in inches (Ø).86 = Load rating.T = Maximum speed rating.

SPACE-SAVER SPARE WHEEL

Pressed steel rim. Tubeless tyre.

WHEEL GEOMETRY

Front wheel toe-in measured from rim torim: 0 ±1 mm.

The values refer to the car in running or-der.

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 189

190

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSMaximum speed rating

Q = up to 160 km/h.

R = up to 170 km/h.

S = up to 180 km/h.

T = up to 190 km/h.

U = up to 200 km/h.

H = up to 210 km/h.

V = up to 240 km/h.

W = up to 270 km/h.

Y = up to 300 km/h.

UNDERSTANDING RIM MARKING

Example: 6 J x 14 ET 40

6 = rim width in inches (1).

J = rim drop center outline (sideprojection where the tyre beadrests) (2).

15 = rim nominal diameter in inches(corresponds to diameter of thetyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø).

ET = “hump” shape and number (reliefon the circumference holding theTubeless tyre bead on the rim).

35 = wheel camber angle (distancebetween the disc/rim supportingplane and the wheel rim centreline).

Load rating

60 = 250 kg 84 = 500 kg

61 = 257 kg 85 = 515 kg

62 = 265 kg 86 = 530 kg

63 = 272 kg 87 = 545 kg

64 = 280 kg 88 = 560 kg

65 = 290 kg 89 = 580 kg

66 = 300 kg 90 = 600 kg

67 = 307 kg 91 = 615 kg

68 = 315 kg 92 = 630 kg

69 = 325 kg 93 = 650 kg

70 = 335 kg 94 = 670 kg

71 = 345 kg 95 = 690 kg

72 = 355 kg 96 = 710 kg

73 = 365 kg 97 = 730 kg

74 = 375 kg 98 = 750 kg

75 = 387 kg 99 = 775 kg

76 = 400 kg 100 = 800 kg

77 = 412 kg 101 = 825 kg

78 = 425 kg 102 = 850 kg

79 = 437 kg 103 = 875 kg

80 = 450 kg 104 = 900 kg

81 = 462 kg 105 = 925 kg

82 = 475 kg 106 = 950 kg

83 = 487 kg

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 190

191

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

RIMS

6J x 14” ET 40

6J x 15” ET 40 (*)

61/2 J x 16” ET 40 (alloy)

6J x 15” ET 40 (*)

61/2 J x 16” ET 40 (alloy)

Standard

185/65 R14 86T

195/60 R15 88T

205/50 R16 87V (**)

195/60 R15 88T

205/50 R16 87V (**)

Snow

185/65 R14 86Q (M+S)

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)

–

195/60 R15 88Q (M+S)

–

Rim

4B x 14” (***)

4B x 15”

4B x 15”

Tyre

135/80 B14 84M (***)

125/80 R15 95M

125/80 R15 95M

TYRES SPACE-SAVER SPARE

1.2 - 1.4 petroland 1.3 Multijet

70HP

1.3 Multijet 90HPand 1.6 Multijet

(*) Optional alloy rim(**) Tyres cannot be fitted with snow chains (***) IMPORTANT: 14” wheel can only be used on 1.2-1.4 petrol type and 1.3 Multijet 70HP cars with a chassis number greater

than 74500

or

VERSIONS

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 191

192

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSCOLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

STANDARD TYRES Size Medium load Full load

Front Rear Front Rear

185/65 R14 86T 2.2 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/60 R15 88T 2.2 2.1 2.3 2.3

205/50 R16 87V 2.2 2.1 2.3 2.3

135/80 B14 84M 2.8SPARE WHEEL

125/80 R15 95M 4.2

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 192

193

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

DIMENSIONS

Dimensions are expressed in mm and re-fer to the vehicle fitted with standardtyres.

The height refers to the vehicle unladen.

Boot volume

Unladen boot volume (V.D.A. standards) . . . . . . . . 315 dm3

F0H0301m

A B C D E F (*) G I

3930 794 2508 628 1660 (●) 1434 1698 1424

(*) Track measurements may vary according to rim size.(●) 1690 with longitudinal bars

fig. 6

PERFORMANCETop admitted speed after initial car use in km/h.

1.216V 1.48V (◊) 1.416V 1.3 Multijet 70HP 1.3 Multijet 90HP 1.6 Multijet

163 163 175 159 173 190


181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 193

194

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

1.216V

1155

500

9408051655

1000400

75

60

1.48V (◊) - 1.416V

1155

500

9408051655

1000400

75

60

1.3 Multijet

1200

500

9408051700

1000400

75

60

WEIGHTS

Weights (kg)

Empty weight (including all fluids, fuel tank at 90 % and with no optional):

Payload (*) including the driver:

Maximum admitted loads (**)– front axle:– rear axle:– total:

Towable loads:– trailer with brakes:– trailer without brakes:

Maximum load on roof:

Maximum load on tow hitch(trailer with brakes):

(*) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch, etc.) the unladen car weight increases thus reducing the specified payload.

(**) Loads not to be exceeded. The driver is responsible for arranging the loads in the boot an/or on the roof so that they comply with these limits.


1.6 Multijet

1275

500

10008051775

1100500

75

60

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 194

195

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

1.416V1.216V 1.3 Multijet 1.6 Multijet1.48V (◊)

CAPACITIES

Fuel tank: including a reserve of:

Fuel tank: including a reserve of:

Engine cooling system:

Engine sump:Engine sump and filter:

Engine sump:Engine sump and filter:

Gearbox/differential casing:

Hydraulic brake circuit:

Windscreen and rear window washerfluid reservoir:

(❒) When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU UP and deminer-alised water.

Specified fuelsRecommended products

Unleaded Premium petrol with no less than 95 R.O.N(EN228 Specifications)

Diesel fuel for motor vehicles (Specification EN590)

Mixture of distilled water andPARAFLU UP at 50% (❒)

SELENIA 20K (❒)

SELENIA WR

TUTELA CAR TECHNYX

TUTELA TOP 4

Mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35

litres

––

47

5 - 7

7.8

–

–

4.4

4.7

–

0.45

1.5

kg

––

–

–

–

–

–

3.74

4.0

1.6

–

–

litres

47

5 - 7

–

–

4.5

2.75

2.9

–

–

1.65

0.45

1.5

kg

––

–

–

–

2.4

2.55

–

–

1.5

–

–

litres

47

5 - 7

–

–

4.5

2.5

2.7

–

–

1.65

0.45

1.5

kg

–

–

–

–

–

2.2

2.35

–

–

1.5

–

–

litres

47

5 - 7

–

–

4.5

2.4

2.6

–

–

1.65

0.45

1.5

kg

–

–

–

–

–

2.1

2.25

–

–

1.5

–

–

litres

––

47

5 - 7

6.0

–

–

2.85

3.0

1.98

0.45

1.5

kg

––

–

–

–

–

–

2.54

2.65

1.8

–

–

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 195

196

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

Fluid and lubricant specificationsfor correct car operation

Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 10W-40, ACEA A3, API SL;FIAT 9.55535-G2 qualification

Synthetic-based oils, grade SAE 5W-40, FIAT 9.55535-N2 qualification

Originalfluids and lubricants

SELENIA 20KContractual Technical Reference N° F405.N04

SELENIA WRContractual Technical Reference N° F515.D06

According to ServiceSchedule

According to ServiceSchedule

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

RECOMMENDED PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS

Use

For diesel engines, in emergency cases where genuine products are not available, lubricants with min. performance ACEA C2 are accepted. Ifthis is the case, the best engine performance is not guaranteed. We however recommend replacing the lubricant with those recommended byFiat Dealership.The use of products with features lower than ACEA A1/B1 and ACEA C2 could cause engine damage which is not covered by warranty.If the vehicle is used in particularly cold climates, ask your Fiat Dealership for the right Selenia product.

Lubricants for petrol engines

Lubricants for Multijet engines

Change

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 196

197

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

Windscreen/rear window

Protective agentfor radiator

Brake liquid

Lubricants and greases for transmission

Use

(●) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix with fluids with specifications other than the specified ones.(❒) When the vehicle is used under particularly harsh climate conditions, we recommend using a 60-40 mixture of PARAFLU UP and demineralised water.

Fluid and lubricant specificationsfor correct car operation

Fully synthetic oil, grade SAE 75W-85 that passes API GL-4PLUS, FIAT 9.55550 MIL-L- 2105 D LEV. SpecificationsQualification FIAT 9.55550-MX3

Specific transmission fluid with “ATF DEXTRON III” type additives.Qualification FIAT 9.55550-AG2

Grease containing Molybdenum bisulphide for high temperature appliances. N.L.G.I. 1-2 consistency.Qualification FIAT 9.55580

Poly-urea oil synthetic-based grease suitable for high temperatures. NL.GI. 2 consistencyQualification FIAT 9.55580

Specifc grease to be used for constant-velocity joints with low friction coefficient. N.L.G.I. 0-1 consistency.Qualification FIAT 9.55580

Synthetic fluid FMVSS no. 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925 SAE J1704,CUNA NC 956- 0Qualification FIAT 9.55597

Red protective with antifreeze action, based on inhibited monoethylen glycol with organic formula based on O.A.T,that passes CUNA NC 956-16, ASTM D 3306 specifications.Qualification FIAT 9.55523

Additive for diesel fuel, protecting Diesel engines.

Mixture of alcohol, water and surfactants CUNA NC 956-IIQualification FIAT 9.55522

Original fluids and lubrificants

TUTELA CAR TECHNYXContractual Technical Reference N° F010.B05

TUTELA CAR GI/EContractual Technical Reference N° F001.C94

TUTELA ALL STAR Contractual Technical Reference N° F702.G07

TUTELA STAR 325Contractual Technical Reference N° F301.D03

TUTELA STAR 700Contractual Technical Reference N° F701.C07

TUTELA TOP 4Contractual Technical Reference N° F001.A93

PARAFLU UP (●)Contractual Technical Reference N° F101.M01

TUTELA DIESEL ARTContractual Technical Reference N° F601.L06

TUTELA PROFES-SIONAL SC 35Contractual Technical Reference N° F201.D02

Additive for diesel fluid

Applications

Mechanical gearbox and differential

Hydraulic power steering

CV joints on wheel side

CV joints on differentialside (1.4 16V)

CV joints on differential side

Brake and clutch hydraulic controls

Cooling circuits Proportion: 50% downto -35° C (❒). Not to bemixed with productshaving different formulas

To be mixed with fueloil(25 cc per 10 litres)

To be used diluted orundiluted in windscreen/rear window washer/wiper systems

181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 197

198

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSFUEL CONSUMPTION

The fuel consumption figures given in the table below are determined on the basis of the homologation tests set down by specificEuropean Directives.

The procedures below are followed for measuring consumption:

❒ urban cycle: cold starting followed by driving that simulates urban use of the car;

❒ extra-urban cycle: frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating extraurban use of the car; the speed varies between 0 and120 km/h;

❒ combined consumption: is calculated weighing about 37% of urban cycle consumption and about 63% of extraurbanconsumption.

IMPORTANT The type of route, traffic situations, weather conditions, driving style, general conditions of the car, trim level/equip-ment/accessories, load, climate control system, roof rack, other situations that affect air drag may lead to different fuel consump-tion levels than those measured.

Fuel consumption according to Directive 1999/100/EC (litres x 100 km) Urban Extra-urban Combined

1.216V 8,4 5,4 6,5

1.48V (◊) 7,9 5,2 6,2

1.416V (5 gears) 8,5 5,5 6,6

1.416V (6 gears) 8,7 5,4 6,6

1.3 Multijet 70HP 5,7 4,0 4,6

1.3 Multijet 90HP 5,8 3,9 4,6

1.6 Multijet 6,2 4,2 4,9


181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 198

199

INDE

XDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NS

CO2 EMISSIONSThe CO2, emission levels at the exhaust given in the following table refer to combined consumption.

CO2 emissions according to 1999/100/EC Directive (g/km)

1.216V 1.48V (◊) 1.416V 1.3 Multijet 70HP 1.3 Multijet 90HP 1.6 Multijet

5 gears 6 gears

154 146 157 157 123 120 129


181-199 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 8:31 Pagina 199

200

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

INDE

XIIINNDDEEXXABS (system) ............................. 83

Accessories purchased by the user ..................................... 86

Air bags (front)........................... 106

– driver's air bag ...................... 106

– passenger's front air bag .... 107

– passenger's front air bagmanual deactivation ........... 108

– Side bags ............................... 108

Air cleaner................................... 166

Air vents .....................................

Ashtray (Smokers' kit) ............ 71

At the filling station................... 90

Automatic two-zone climatecontrol system ......................... 51

Battery

– checking the charge............. 173

– jump starting ......................... 134

– recharging .............................. 158

– replacing ............................... 173

Bodywork

– maintenance ......................... 178

– version codes........................ 184

Bonnet ......................................... 80

Boot ............................................. 76

– extension ............................... 77

– light ......................................... 152

Brake lights

– bulb replacement ................. 151

Brakes

– fluid level ............................... 172

– handbrake ............................. 114

– service and emergency ....... 188

Bulb (replacement) ................... 144

Capacities ................................... 195

Car inactivity ............................. 122

Car maintenance........................ 161

– additional checks.................. 165

– Annual Inspection Schedule 165

– scheduled service................. 162

– Service Schedule .................. 163

Cargo box ................................... 69

Carrying children safely............ 99

Ceiling lights................................ 64


Cellular telephones

– presetting............................... 85

Checking fluid levels ............... 167

Child lock ................................... 17

Cigar lighter (Smokers' kit) ..... 71

Clutch .......................................... 187

CO2 emissions .......................... 199

Containing running costs ......... 116

Correct use of the car ............ 111

Cruise Control .......................... 63

Dashboard and controls ......... 4

Diesel fuel filter ................... 166-173

Dimensions ............................... 193

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 200

201

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

INDE

X

Dipped beam headlights


– control .................................. 59

Direction indicators ................. 59


– control .................................. 59

Door pockets ............................. 69

Doors........................................ 17-134

Emergency device for locking doors from the outside ...... 17-134

Dualdrive

(electric power steering) ...... 87

EBD (electronic brake forcedistributor) ................................. 83

Emergency device for lockingdoors from the outside ......... 17

Engine

– fuel feed ................................. 187

– identification code ............... 184

– injection/ignition ................. 187

– technical data ....................... 185

Engine coolant gauge................. 19

Engine coolant level ................ 170

Engine oil

– checking level........................ 169

– consumption ......................... 169

– technical specifications ....... 195

EOBD (system) ......................... 84

External lights ............................. 58

Fiat CODE (system) ............... 9

Fix &Go (tyre repair kit) ......... 136

Flashing the headlights ............. 58

Fluids and lubricants ................ 196

Follow me home (device) ....... 59

FPS (fuel cut-off switch) .......... 67

Front fog lights


– control button...................... 66

Fuel

– consumption ......................... 198

– fuel cut-off switch ................ 67

– level gauge ............................ 19

Fuel cut-off switch ..................... 67

Fuel filler cap............................... 91

Fuses ............................................. 153

Gearbox (use). .......................... 115

Glass/can holders....................... 69

Handbrake ................................. 114

Hazard lights

– control .................................. 66

Head restraints ......................... 41

Headlights ................................... 82

(electric adjusting device) ..... 82

Heated rear window ............... 44

Heating and ventilation............. 45

Identification data .................... 182

Ignition switch ........................... 18

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 201

202

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

INDE

XIn an emergency ........................ 133

Instrument panel ....................... 7

Instruments ................................. 19

Interior equipment ................... 68

Interior fittings

– glass / can holder ................. 69

– magnetic card/ticket slots .. 69

– oddment compartments .... 68

– rear CD compartment with glass/can holder .......... 70

– roof bracket .......................... 68

– roof console.......................... 70

– upper oddmentcompartments ....................... 68

Interiors ...................................... 180

Isofix ............................................. 103

Jack .............................................. 141

Jacking the car ............................ 158

Key kit and door locking ........ 10

Light control buttons ............. 58

Load limiters ............................... 97

Lubricants (specifications)........ 196

Magnetic card/ticket slots ...... 69

Main beam headlights


– control .................................. 58

– flashing.................................... 58

Manual climate controlsystem ....................................... 48

Multifunction display (oncomfort instrument panel) ... 20

– controls.................................. 21

Multifunction display (on modal instrument panel) 23

– controls.................................. 23

Number plate light

– bulb replacement ................ 151

Oddment compartments........ 68

Outlets ......................................... 70

Parking ....................................... 114

Parking sensors .......................... 88

Performance................................ 193

Plates ........................................... 182

Pollen filter ................................. 166

Power windows ......................... 74

Pretensioners.............................. 97

Prolonged car inactivity .......... 122

Protecting the environment .... 92

Radio transmitters andcellular telephones .................. 86

Rain sensor ................................ 61

Rear fog lights


– control button...................... 66

Rear window washer

– control .................................. 62

– fluid level ............................... 171

Rear window wipers

– control .................................. 62

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 202

203

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

INDE

X

– blades .................................... 176

– nozzles.................................... 177

Rearview mirrors....................... 42

Rev counter ................................ 19

Rims ............................................. 189

Roof racks ................................. 81

Rubber hoses.............................. 176

Safety devices ............................ 93

Seat belts

– general instructions ............ 97

– height adjustment ............... 95

– maintenance ......................... 99

– S.B.R. system......................... 94

– use .......................................... 94

Seats.............................................. 36

Side/taillights


– control .................................. 58

Snow chains ............................... 121

Symbols ........................................ 9

Technical specifications........... 181

Third brake light

– bulb replacement ................ 151

Towing the car ........................... 159

Towing trailers ........................... 117

Transmission............................... 187

Transporting childrensafely........................................... 99

Tyres

– snow tyres............................. 120

– standard ................................. 189

– correct tyre reading............ 189

Warning lights and messages.................................... 123

Weights........................................ 194

Wheel

– spare wheel ........................... 189

– changing ................................ 140

Sound system

– installation ............................ 85

– preset system ...................... 85

Spark plugs .................................. 185

Speedometer .............................. 19

Starting the engine..................... 112

– bump starting........................ 135

– emergency start-up ............. 113

– ignition switch ..................... 18

– jump starting ........................ 134

– Multijet engines .................... 142

– petrol engines ...................... 112

– stopping the engine ............. 113

– warming up the engine ...... 113

Steering . ...................................... 188

Steering lock .............................. 18

Steering wheel (adjustment) ... 36

Sunroof......................................... 72

Sun visors ................................... 71

Suspensions ................................. 188

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 203

204

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

INDE

XWheel geometry ....................... 189

Windows (cleaning) .................. 60

Windscreen washer

– control ................................. 60

– fluid level................................ 60

Windscreen wiper

– blades .................................... 171

– nozzles .................................. 60

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 204

205

SAFE

TYDE

VICE

SCO

RREC

T USE

OF TH

E CAR

WAR

NING

LIGHT

S AND

MESS

AGES

IN A

NEM

ERGE

NCY

CAR

MAIN

TENA

NCE

TECH

NICA

LSP

ECIFI

CATIO

NSDA

SHBO

ARD

AND C

ONTR

OLS

INDE

X

PROVISIONS FOR THE PROCESSING OF A VEHICLE AT THE END OF ITS LIFE-CYCLE

For years now Fiat has been developing its global commitment towards the safeguarding and protection of the Environment throughthe continuous improvement of its production processes and the making of increasingly more “eco friendly” products. With a viewto guaranteeing the best possible service to clients in full observance of environmental standards and in response to the obligationsimposed by European Directive 2000/53/EC on end-of-life vehicles, Fiat offers its clients the possibility to hand in their vehicle* atthe end of its life span without additional costs.

The European Directive, in fact, provides for the take-back of the vehicle without the last holder or owner of the same incurring expenses due to the fact that the market value of the vehicle is zero or negative. In particular, in almost all of the countries of the European Union, up until 1st January 2007, take-back of the vehicle free of charge only applies to vehicles registered from 1 July2002 on, while, from 2007 on, take-back will be carried out free of charge, independently of the year of registration, provided thatthe vehicle still contains all its essential component parts (especially engine and body) and is free from additional waste materials.

Our contracted network of authorised treatment facilities has been carefully selected in order to provide a quality service to ourcustomers by de-polluting and recycling “End of Life Vehicles” to approved environmental standards. To find out the location of yournearest authorised treatment facility, offering free of charge take-back, simply contact one of our dealers or refer to the Fiat website or call the toll free number 00800 3428 0000.

* Passenger transportation vehicles to seat a max. of nine persons, having a total admissible weight of 3.5 t

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 205

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 206

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 207

FUEL CAPACITIES (litres)

Fiat Group Automobiles S.p.A. - Customer Services - Technical Services - Service EngineeringLargo Senatore G. Agnelli, 5 - 10040 Volvera - Torino (Italia)

Print no. 603.81.455 - 07/2008 - 1st edition

COLD TYRE INFLATION PRESSURE (bar)

1.216V 1.48V - 1.416V 1.3 Multijet 1.9 Multijet

Tank capacity 47 47 47 47

Reserve 5 - 7 5 - 7 5 - 7 5 - 7

Refuel petrol engines with unleaded petrol with an octane rating (RON) no lower than 95 only. Refuel diesel engines with diesel fuel for motor vehicles (EN590 specifications) only.

ENGINE OIL CHANGE1.216V 1.48V 1.416V 1.3 Multijet 1.9 Multijet

litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kg litres kgEngine sump 2.5 2.2 2.4 2.1 2.75 2.4 2.85 2.5 4.2 3.75Engine sump and filter 2.7 2.35 2.6 2.25 2.9 2.55 3.0 2.6 4.4 3.9

STANDARD TYRES Size Medium load Full load

Front Rear Front Rear

185/65 R14 86T 2.2 2.1 2.3 2.3

195/60 R15 88T 2.2 2.1 2.3 2.3

205/50 R16 87V 2.2 2.1 2.3 2.3

135/80 B14 84M 2.8SPARE WHEEL

125/80 R15 95M 4.2

Add +0.3 bar to the prescribed inflation pressure when the tyres are warm. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.With snow tyres, add +0.2 bar to the inflation pressure value prescribed for standard tyres.

200-208 idea GB 1 ed 10-07-2008 10:58 Pagina 208

aftersales.fiat.comaftersales.fiat.com/elumdata/en/00/135_idea/00_135_idea... · 2012. 6. 14. ·...

Documents